JP2017023809A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an attention degree to a game favorably.SOLUTION: A board surface of a game board 24 includes a game area, and the game area includes a first operation hole 301 and a second operation hole 311. When a game ball enters the first operation hole 301, a main control device stores it as reservation information in a main control device and, when a game ball enters the second operation hole 311, stores it as reservation information in the main control device. The game machine starts a variable display of symbols on a symbol display device 41 and a variable display of symbols on a main symbol display device 43 on the basis of the reservation information of the first operation hole 301 and the reservation information of the second operation hole 311. In this case, among the reservation information of the first operation hole 301 and the reservation information of the second operation hole 311, the reservation information of the second operation hole 311 is preferentially consumed and a reservation notification for notifying of a content of the reservation information of the first operation hole 301 may be sometimes executed on the symbol display device 41.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 65

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit state when a gaming ball has entered a starting ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Is called. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. By displaying, the lottery result is taught to the player. Then, when the lottery result is so-called winning game state winning, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, and the game ball according to the number of pitches to the variable pitching device Is issued.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the pattern is being displayed, the lottery information used for the winning lottery is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be memorized. When the lottery information and the like are stored on hold, after the display of the variation of the pattern is finished, a winning lottery is performed using the stored lottery information, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (for example, patent) Reference 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-mentioned examples, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
A starting pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A variable pitching means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
A granting means for granting a game ball to a player based on a game ball entering the variable pitching means;
When it is determined whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Is a transition determination means for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means for causing
With
By the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition means, the number of times the switching between the open state and the closed state is performed in the variable pitching means becomes a predetermined number of times In the gaming machine in which the variable entry control is performed and the transition determination is not performed in the state in which the variable entry control is performed,
As the gaming state, a high probability correspondence state and a low probability correspondence state in which the probability of the transition correspondence result is relatively high and low are set,
In the high probability corresponding state, the number of the transition information is larger than the low probability corresponding state,
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The second starting entrance portion includes an acceptance control means capable of switching between a non-acceptance state where a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and an accept state where a game ball is easier to enter. ,
The acceptance control means has a first mode and a second mode that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode as a control mode of the second starting entrance part, and the variable entrance control. In the state where the variable pitch control is performed by means, the first mode is set.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first starting entrance part, with the first prescribed number as an upper limit;
Second acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the second starting entrance part, with a second prescribed number as an upper limit;
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and the second acquisition information storage means,
The special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is more subject to determination by the transition determination unit than the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the determination target of the transition determination unit. It is configured so that the game result that is advantageous for the player is more likely to occur,
The gaming machine is
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means for making the transition determination to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means,
In the low-probability corresponding state and the first mode, the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored or stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination In a situation where the corresponding special notification is executed at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transition determination, the high probability corresponding state and the second mode, First notification control means for preventing predetermined special information stored in or stored in one acquired information storage means from being subject to execution of the special notification;
In the situation corresponding to the high probability state and the second mode, the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination Second notification control means for causing the corresponding special notification to be executed at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the transition determination;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to a game.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) The front view of the operating port apparatus which shows the case where an electrically-driven accessory is a closed state, (b) The front view of an operating-port apparatus which shows the case where an electric accessory is an open state. (A) The longitudinal cross-sectional view of the area | region including the main display part and its front side, (b) The front view of the segment indicator which comprises the main display part. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery lottery etc. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st result display parts, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd result display parts. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a holding ball storage area. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for non-explicit 2R probability change, and (c) a stop result table for 15R probability change. An explanatory diagram for explaining, (d) an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal jackpot stop result table, (e) an explanatory diagram for explaining a special outage stop result table, and (f) an ordinary out put Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a stop result table. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for probability variation big hits. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for the time of detachment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation completion process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support. The flowchart which shows an electric utility opening / closing process. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the command response process in MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a 1st response process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table of the table | surfaces for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table of the table for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting. The flowchart which shows the specific process for a pending | holding alert | report. The flowchart which shows a 2nd response process. The flowchart which shows a 4th response process. The flowchart which shows the holding | maintenance alert | report control process in MPU of a display control apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area for a hold display information setting. The flowchart which shows the hold display information setting process at the time of winning. The flowchart which shows the output process of an internal command. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the hold alert | report performed in the 1st hold display area of a symbol display apparatus. The front view of the game board for demonstrating the structure of the game area | region in 2nd Embodiment. The time chart for demonstrating the mode of the game by a player. The flowchart which shows the information acquisition process in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a pending | holding alert | report. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table of the table | surfaces for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table of the table for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting. The flowchart which shows the setting process of an operation winning command. The flowchart which shows the 3rd corresponding | compatible process in 4th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a 4th response process. The flowchart which shows the process for a setting to a pending | holding alerting | reporting impossible state. The flowchart which shows the 4th corresponding | compatible process in 5th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a 3rd response process. The flowchart which shows the process for a setting to a pending | holding alerting | reporting impossible state. The flowchart which shows the 4th corresponding | compatible process in 6th Embodiment. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the acceptance table for low probability modes in 7th Embodiment, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table of the table | surfaces for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table of the table for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting. The flowchart which shows the specific process for a pending | holding alert | report. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold | maintenance alerting | reporting which concerns on the lower operation port in 8th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of an operation winning command. 7 is a flowchart showing a hold notification control process. The flowchart which shows the output process of an internal command. The time chart for demonstrating the effect | action by holding notification. The front view of the game board for demonstrating the structure of the game area | region in 9th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a common distribution table. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a non-priority side reach non-occurrence table, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a priority side reach non-occurrence table.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion or a non-priority starting entering ball portion) 33, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion or a priority starting ball) Part) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display part 43, an accessory display part 44, and the like.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 34 larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 33. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each operating port 33, 34, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 32 larger than the payout number related to each operating port 33, 34.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, with the upper operation port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  Details of the electric accessory 34a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A shows a case where the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state), and FIG. 5B is a state where the electric accessory 34a is in an open state (supported state or guide state). Shows the case.

  The working port case 33a constituting the upper working port 33 projects to the near side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, with the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the working port case 33a (that is, the left-right width of the upper working port 33) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. The length is longer than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the interval between the two operation openings 33, 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  In addition to the configuration in which the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a two-stage configuration with a narrow upper portion and a lower lower portion. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the mouth 33, or a failure nail may be implanted obliquely below the working port case 33a.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win or a special off-winning win is made. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decoration member 39, a part of the plurality of general winning ports 31 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  The main display unit 43 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6A is a longitudinal sectional view of the main display portion 43 and a region including the front side thereof, and FIG. 6B is a front view of the segment display 101 constituting the main display portion 43.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the main display unit 43 includes a segment display 101, a display substrate 102 on which the segment display 101 is mounted, and a cover panel 103 provided in front of the segment display 101. And.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the segment display 101 is provided with three display areas RS, AS, and BS side by side on its display surface. In these three display areas RS to BS, eight display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are provided, respectively. Each of the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 has individual light sources composed of LEDs, and the individual light sources are controlled to be turned on / off, so that only one arbitrary display segment is provided. Can be lit, and any combination of display segments can be lit. Accordingly, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed in the display areas RS to BS. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8. .

  In the three display areas RS to BS, display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are arranged so that a predetermined symbol can be displayed with the same size and the same shape. Specifically, for each display region RS, the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are numbers. "1" to "9" and alphabets "F", "H", and "L" are arranged so as to be displayed at least. The eighth display segment R8 is a circular display segment, and is disposed on the side of the lower right portion of the region where the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are provided. Therefore, in the display area RS, “1” to “9” and “F”, “H”, “L”, “1.” to “9.”, “F.”, “H.”, “L”. . ”Can be displayed at least.

  In addition, in the three display areas RS to BS, if it is possible to individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols and display a predetermined symbol with the same size and the same shape, The display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 may have any shape and arrangement, and may be configured to use 7 segments or 9 segments instead of 8 segments. . Moreover, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are the same, and different colors may be displayed for the display areas RS to BS. In any or all display areas RS to BS, the colors displayed in the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 may be appropriately changed. Moreover, the structure which controls lighting or light extinction of each display segment R1-R8, A1-A8, B1-B8 by carrying out on-off control of a light source is not essential, and each display segment R1-R8, A1- If display control can be performed individually in A8, B1 to B8, a segment display device may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, the segment display may not be applied to each display area, but the symbol may be displayed by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

  The three display areas RS, AS, and BS each have a function of clearly (or teaching) different information to the player and the manager of the game hall. Specifically, in the left display area RS, when the variable winning device 32 is in the opening / closing execution mode (or in the opening / closing execution mode) by winning the big win, the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode. This is a round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened.

  The intermediate display area AS is a first result display section AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in the upper working port 33. In this case, in the first result display section AS, the change display of the pattern by sequentially turning on and off the first display segment A1 to the eighth display segment A8 using the winning to the upper working port 33 as a trigger (or (Variable display or switching display) is performed, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is clearly indicated by the display as a stop result of the variable display. Note that the mode of the variable display is arbitrary. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in relation to the round display part RS, it can be said that the first result display part AS is provided adjacent to the round display part RS.

  The display area BS on the right side is a second result display section BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in the lower working port 34. In this case, in the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the picture by sequentially turning on and off the first display segment B1 to the eighth display segment B8 using the winning of the lower working port 34 as a trigger (or (Variable display or switching display) is performed, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is clearly indicated by the display as a stop result of the variable display. Note that the mode of the variable display is arbitrary. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the front surface of the segment indicator 101, “R” is added as a symbol for clearly indicating that a round display is to be performed at a position below the round display section RS, and a position below the first result display section AS. Is numbered “1” as a symbol for clearly indicating that the result of the lottery based on the winning in the upper operating port 33 is to be displayed, and is positioned below the second result display section BS. A number “2” is attached as a symbol for clearly indicating that the lottery result is displayed based on the winning at the lower working port 34.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. Once.

  The segment display 101 having the above configuration is mounted on the display substrate 102 from the side opposite to the display surface. The display substrate 102 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, through electrical wiring, and when a drive signal is output from the main control device to the display substrate 102, each display segment R1-R8, A1- A8, B1 to B8 are turned on.

  The display substrate 102 on which the segment display 101 is mounted is configured such that the entire display units RS to BS of the segment display 101 are exposed on the front surface of the decoration member 39 through the opening 39 a provided in the decoration member 39. It is positioned and fixed from the back side of the decorative member 39.

  The opening 39 a of the decorative member 39 is closed by the cover panel 103 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the segment display 101. The cover panel 103 is opposed to the entire display units RS to BS in the segment display 101, and the display on the display units RS to BS is visible through the window panel 62 and the cover panel 103 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is formed so as to be translucent. Specifically, the cover panel 103 is made of a synthetic resin and is formed to be black translucent. By making the cover panel 103 semi-transparent in this way, the display on each display unit RS to BS is more transparent than the configuration in which the cover panel 103 is formed colorless and transparent while making the display on each display unit RS to BS visible. Disappears. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's attention to the display of the symbol display apparatus 41 mentioned later rather than the display in each display part RS-BS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover panel 103 may be formed to be colorless and transparent, or the cover panel 103 may be omitted.

  Although the detailed description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the display part 44 for an accessory has a segment indicator similarly to the main display part 43, and the result display part for an accessory is provided in the said segment indicator. Yes. The accessory result display unit is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, in the result display section for an accessory, a variable display (or variable display or switching display) is performed by sequentially turning on and off each display segment using a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is clearly indicated by the display as the result of the change display stop. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric character is released, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the result display section for the accessory and the variable display After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner. The accessory display unit 44 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and other configurations exemplified in the main display unit 43 may be applied, and a configuration different from the main display unit 43 may be applied. May be.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  A first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the first result display portion AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. Further, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp unit 46 is turned on. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 45 and the second holding ramp portion 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  Below the center frame 42, a third holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory result display portion of the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp portion 47. In addition, the structure etc. by which each holding lamp | ramp parts 45-47 are displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 41 may be sufficient.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and an audio lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a power failure monitoring board having a function of monitoring a power source. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 83 made of the same. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 84 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is made, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entering portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The segment display 101 which comprises the part 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the segment display unit 101 is executed in the MPU 202, and the segment display unit is used in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. Display control of the round display unit RS in 101 is executed.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal plate 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. In this case, the external output terminal plate 99 has a jackpot signal output terminal (first state signal output terminal) 99a and a jackpot and special out signal output terminal (second state signal) as output terminals for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. Output terminal) 99b.

  When the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 202 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal 99a. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal 99a, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as will be described later, even if the winning / losing lottery result based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is not a big win, the variable winning device 32 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. A special loss result (that is, a small hit) is provided as one type of game result. In this case, when the game result is a jackpot result or when the game result is a special loss result, the MPU 202 sends a jackpot and special loss signal output terminal 99b to the management controller on the game hall side. It is possible to output jackpot and special off-line signals. Specifically, in normal times, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot and special loss signal output terminal 99b, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot result or a special loss result is obtained. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker. The unit 64 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the symbol combination display time on the symbol display device 41 and finally the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. The lottery of the presence / absence of reach and the contents of reach production is executed.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state in which a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and then an explicit movie is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result, which will be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and thereafter , The common video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

  The first hold display area Ga is set on the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, and the second hold display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower part of the display screen G.

  In the first holding display area (non-priority side holding display area) Ga, the unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 is four, and the first reserved display area Ga corresponding to this is the first unit reserved display area Ga1, second A unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball is displayed in the upper operation port 33. When the number of holds when winning is 4, the predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4. The display contents in the first hold display area Ga will be described later in detail.

  In the second hold display area (priority hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the lower operating hole 34 is four, and the second reserved display area Gb is associated with the first unit reserved display area Gb1, second A unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

  For example, if the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. In the case where the number of holds is 4, the hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Gb1 to the fourth unit hold display area Gb4. The display contents in the second hold display area Gb will be described in detail later.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43 And the second result display unit BS and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the symbol display device 41. It is set to be. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 232 including a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total number of reservations storage area. In the reserved ball storage area 232, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is designed to be stored.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, as the success / failure table, the success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 10 (a) and the success / failure table for high probability mode in FIG. 10 (b) (high Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Moreover, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is an outlier result except for the random number value that is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, two types of special outlook results and normal outlook results are set as outlier results. Has been. These differences will be described later.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 29) and then returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  Here, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes relatively high. As described above, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed 15 times (the number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 32a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is set so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 32a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 increases from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to when it ends, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not as described above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 is not substantially generated.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the minimum secured time is secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character releasing lottery is performed. By applying any one condition or any combination of conditions (that is, shortening the one-time variable display time in the display part 44 for an accessory) and increasing the winning probability, the low frequency support mode is applied. The advantage of the high frequency support mode may be increased.

  The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit in FIG. 11A and a second result display unit in FIG. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 11A, as the distribution destination of the game result, the normal jackpot result (low-probability corresponding special game result), the unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result (non- Explicit high-probability corresponding game result or latent probability variation state), explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result or sudden probability variation result), 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability special game result) Has been.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained at the previous mode. It is a result. In other words, the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (non-explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” is unspecified. It corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, “15 to 19” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and “20 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot result, thereby diversifying the mode of the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when the three types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the second highest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency support mode, and the support mode is the low-frequency winning mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2R probability variation jackpot result is lowest. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In particular, in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, but the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the normal gaming state. Then, as a gaming state, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a high probability mode even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode. It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 11B, only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the game result distribution destination. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result distribution mode in the case of winning the jackpot is based on the winning win based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on.

  Here, regardless of whether the distribution table for the first result display section or the distribution table for the second result display section is used, the probability of a promiscuous jackpot result when the jackpot is won is the same. Yes. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. ing. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display section, the number of values of the big hit type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation big hit result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is determined based on whether or not a big win is won based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and a big winning win based on the winning to the lower working port 34. (Specifically, 2/3).

  However, if a big win is won based on the winning of the lower working port 34 and a probable big hit result is generated, a 15R probable big winning result is always obtained, whereas a big win is won based on the winning of the upper working port 33 and In the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probable jackpot result or an explicit 2R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/4, and a 15R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/2. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot win is won based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  In addition, in the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result, the winning / raft lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends as described above, but the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. When compared with the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the opportunity to receive game balls is reduced by the fact that the electric accessory 34a is less likely to be in the open state, and further, based on the distribution table for the second result display section. The possibility that a lottery will be performed is reduced.

  As described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 have a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays a game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the lower working port 34 among the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and accordingly, the frequency of winning in the lower working port 34. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, when a result of losing is determined in the lottery, a result of normal losing or a special losing result is obtained. In this case, in the case of a normal losing result that occurs with a relatively high probability when the result is a losing result, the open / close execution mode is not shifted, and further, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

  On the other hand, a special failure result that occurs with a relatively low probability when a failure result is obtained results in a special failure state. In the special losing state, the open / close execution mode is entered in a situation where the result of losing is determined in the lottery. However, the opening / closing execution mode of the transfer destination is the low-frequency winning mode. Therefore, even if the result is a special losing result, it is not possible to expect a game ball to be awarded to the big prize opening 32a. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode do not shift.

  By setting the special loss result as described above, the opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 can be used as an effect. Here, not in the opening / closing execution mode, but also in the normal gaming state where the winning / raising lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, if the result is a special outage result, the low frequency winning mode is executed. Only the mode is changed, and thereafter, the normal gaming state is restored. On the other hand, when the above-described implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode, and thereafter, the winning / raising lottery mode is high although the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Probability mode. As a result, the occurrence of a special outage result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result will result in a transition to the opening / closing execution mode as the same low-frequency winning mode, and then the support mode becomes low-frequency support. In both cases, the difference between the two is that the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode in the former, whereas the high probability mode is in the latter. In other words, the occurrence of a special loss result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are common to the behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 However, only the internal lottery state is different. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode occurs under the normal gaming state, it is possible to imagine whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode afterwards. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  When the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10A, the number of random numbers resulting in the special loss result is two, as is the case with the random number winning the big hit. On the other hand, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the random number value resulting from the special losing result is the special number in the low probability mode. It is one smaller than the number of random number values that will be the result of divergence. In this way, by reducing the number of random values that result in special outliers to be less than the number of random number values that are won in big hits in the high probability mode, the jackpot is greater than the probability that results in special outage in the high probability mode. The probability of winning can be increased. In addition, by setting the number of random numbers resulting in special outliers to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a special outage result in the high probability mode is lower than in the low probability mode. Can also be lowered.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the game machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result in the game times to be, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result in the previous stage.

  In other words, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 8 will be described in detail. First, in the state where the symbol variation display is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and further in the state where the symbol variation display is finished in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. . The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS and at the variation start time of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

  For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 249 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, the MPU 202 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. A variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, the MPU 202 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

<Configuration of the holding ball storage area 232>
Next, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  The first result display section holding area Ra stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. Is a reserved area for In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for storing. Here, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, the first result display area of the both reservation areas Ra and Rb will be described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It consists of an area and more. With the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 are stored on hold.

  The C1 storage area is composed of 2 bytes, and the jackpot counter C1 value of any of 0 to 599 is stored using the lower 10 bits of 0 to 9. The upper 6 bits of 10 to 15 in the C1 storage area are unused areas.

  The C2 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and the jackpot type counter C2 value of any of 0 to 29 is stored using the lower 5 bits of 0 to 4. The upper 2 bits of 5 to 7 in the C2 storage area are unused areas.

  The C3 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and one of the reach random number counters C3 of 0 to 238 is stored using all 8 bits of 0 to 7.

  The reserved number storage area is a storage area for storing the number of use of the storage area, that is, the number of the game balls won in the upper operation port 33 and held. The reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value of 0 to 4 is stored using the lower 3 bits of 0 to 2. The upper 5 bits of 3 to 7 in the reserved number storage area are unused areas.

  In addition, in the reserved ball storage area 232, the total number of holds for storing information of the sum of the number of holds in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the number of holds in the second result display area reservation area Rb. A storage area is provided. The total reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value from 0 to 8 is stored using lower 4 bits of 0 to 3. Of the total reserved number storage area, the upper 4 bits of 4 to 7 are unused areas.

  The execution area AE shown in FIG. 9 is stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when the variable display of each result display section AS, BS is started. This is an area for moving each value. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb, that is, a C1 storage area having a 2-byte configuration, a C2 storage area having a 1-byte configuration, and a 1-byte configuration. And a C3 storage area.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S104, a winning process for the operating port accompanying winning in the operating ports 33, 34 is executed, and in addition, in a step S105, a winning process for winning in accordance with winning in the through gate 35 is executed. This timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The winning opening process for the operation port in step S104 and the through winning process in step S105 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33 whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning prize) in the upper operation port 33. If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the upper working port 33. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, in step S206, whether or not the game ball has won the lower working port 34 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower working port 34. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set in step S207. In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34. In step S209, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S206 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is finished as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process S501 of a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved start storages N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding result display unit hold area is set to 1 in step S302. In addition to the increment, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302.

  That is, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S103 are used for the first result display unit. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation storage number RaN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  If the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used for the second result display section. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved memory number RbN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  In the subsequent step S305, an operation winning command (start winning command or information for making the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that a game ball has won the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). Start selection information) is executed. Specifically, depending on whether the first start hold memory number RaN or the second start hold memory number RbN is set as the start hold memory number N, the operation port that is the target of the current information acquisition process is activated. Whether the port 33 or the lower working port 34 is specified. In the case of the lower operating port 34, an operation winning command including information indicating that a winning to the lower operating port 34 has occurred is selected from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 as the current operating winning command.

  On the other hand, in the case of the upper working port 33, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the winning to the upper working port 33 has occurred as the current working winning command, and the first result in step S304. An operation winning command including information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the storage area of the display unit reservation area Ra is selected. That is, the operation winning command in this case includes the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as they are.

  In the subsequent step S306, the operation winning command selected in step S305 is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82, and then the information acquisition process is terminated. The operation winning command set in step S306 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received operation winning command, the display on the first holding lamp unit 45 and the second holding lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36, the first holding display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, and Processing for changing the display in the second hold display area Gb in accordance with the increase in the number of hold is executed. This will be described in detail later.

  Note that, instead of the operation winning command, a hold notification command including information that a winning to the upper operation port 33 has occurred, and a content command including information corresponding to the winning lottery or the distribution lottery in the holding information related to the winning May be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

<Winning winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not the accessory reserve storage number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

  On the condition that the game ball wins the through gate 35 and that the accessory reservation storage number SN <4, the process proceeds to step S403, and the accessory reservation storage number SN is incremented by one. Subsequently, in step S404, the value of the electric utility product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the electric utility reservation area 233 of the RAM 204. Then, after turning on the third holding lamp section 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of stored storage, the main winning process is terminated. The third hold lamp unit 47 is sequentially lit from the left side. For example, if the accessory reservation storage number SN is 1, the leftmost third reservation lamp unit 47 is turned on and the accessory reservation storage number SN is If it is 4, all the 3rd holding | maintenance lamp | ramp parts 47 will be lighted.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S401 that a game ball has won the through gate 35, or if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the reserved item storage number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the electric accessory release counter C4 The prize winning process is terminated without storing the value of.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As its outline, the processing of steps S501 to S507 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S508 and S509 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If an effect command such as a change start command, a type command, or a change end command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

  Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S503, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S504, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the result display sections AS and BS on the side performing variation display, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S505, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In step S <b> 506, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34 a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. The details of the power combination support process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S508 and S509). That is, in step S508, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S509, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S506 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game times starting process of steps S603 to S605 and the game times progressing process of steps S606 to S609. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. This determination is made as to whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. This is done by judging. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start process in steps S603 to S605. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the common hold number CRN is “0” means that the start hold storage number is “0” for both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display in step S604. In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is performed, and then the game number control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the change start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S707 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S708 to S713.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display hold area Ra and the second result display hold area Rb, the second result display hold area corresponding to the lower operation port 34. The hold information stored in Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S702, the first reserved storage number RaN of the first result display unit reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S703, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S705, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S706, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S707, a shift time command (shift occurrence information) that is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A shift time command including information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, the number of the hold is reduced based on the received command at the time of shift, the display in the first hold lamp unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41. Execute the process to change in accordance with. This will be described in detail later.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S708, the second reserved storage number RbN of the second result display unit reserved area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S709, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S710, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the memory | storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S711 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S712, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S713, a command at the time of shifting (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the voice lamp control device 82, the number of the hold is reduced based on the received shift command, the display on the second hold lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display on the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41. Execute the process to change in accordance with. This will be described in detail later.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in the high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. Determine whether. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  If it is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 10 (a). It is determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S803 by referring to a high probability mode determination table. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 10 (b). It is determined whether or not.

  After the process of step S802 or step S803, in step S804 to step S812, a process for setting the game result of the current game round is executed, and in the current game round, the first result display unit AS or the first (2) A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed in one of the result display units BS is ended is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

  Here, the stop result table will be described with reference to FIG. 21A is a stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, FIG. 21B is a stop result table for non-explicit 2R probability change, and FIG. 21C is a stop result table for 15R probability change. FIG. 21D is a normal jackpot stop result table, FIG. 21E is a special miss stop result table, and FIG. 21F is a normal miss stop result table.

  Information on the stop result is stored in advance in the ROM 203 as stop result data. Each stop result data is set not only for the contents of the stop result to be displayed when the variable display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is ended, but in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode In addition, the content of the number of rounds to be displayed on the round display part RS (the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened) is also set. That is, in each stop result data, the content of the stop result in the result display unit and the content of the number of rounds in the round display unit RS are set as a pair.

  As the stop result data, a plurality of data of data 1 to data 12 is stored. Among these data 1 to 12, data 1 and data 2 are stop result data for explicit 2R probability change, data 3 and data 4 are stop result data for implicit 2R probability change, data 5 and data 6 is stop result data for 15R probability change, data 7 and data 8 are usually stop result data for big hits, data 9 and data 10 are stop result data for special outage, and data 11 and data 12 are This is stop result data for normal removal. That is, a plurality of stop result data is set for each game result.

  It is not essential that two pieces of stop result data are set for one game result. Even if the number of pieces of stop result data set for a game result is different for each game result. It may be different in a predetermined combination.

  The stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, the stop result table for unspecified 2R probability change, the stop result table for 15R probability change, and the stop result table for normal jackpot each include the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and stop result data. Is stored. Specifically, the address of the stop result data is stored in association with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. On the other hand, the correspondence relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the stop result data is stored in each of the special outage stop result table and the normal outage stop result table. Specifically, the address of the stop result data is stored in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  For details of each stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21A, the stop result table for explicit 2R probability change is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the explicit 2R probability change jackpot result. Among “15-19”, “15-17” corresponds to the stop result data of data 1, and “18-19” corresponds to the stop result data of data 2. In this case, in the stop result data of data 1, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “5”. Further, in the stop result data of data 2, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “7”.

  In the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change, as shown in FIG. 21B, among the “10 to 14” set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the implicit 2R probability change jackpot result, “10 to 12” corresponds to the stop result data of data 3, and “13 to 14” corresponds to the stop result data of data 4. In this case, in the stop result data of data 3, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “5.”. Further, in the stop result data of data 4, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “7.”.

  Here, as described above, the case where the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs is a case where a game ball is won in the upper operating port 33 and the jackpot is won in the lottery. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 1 to data 4 are set only in the first result display part AS among the first result display part AS and the second result display part BS.

  In the stop result table for 15R probability change, as shown in FIG. 21C, among “10 to 29” set as the value of the big hit type counter C2 corresponding to the 15R probability change big hit result, “10 to 19” "Corresponds to the stop result data of data 5, and" 20 to 29 "corresponds to the stop result data of data 6. In this case, in the stop result data of data 5, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “L”. Further, in the stop result data of data 6, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “H”.

  Here, as described above, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the game ball wins at the upper operation port 33 and the game ball wins at the lower operation port 34 when the game ball wins the winning jackpot. In either case, the winning lottery is either a big win. Among them, in the latter, since “10-29” is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result data of the data 5 or the stop result data of the data 6 Either one is selected. On the other hand, in the former, since “20 to 29” is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, only the stop result data of the data 6 is selected. Therefore, the content of the result display corresponding to the data 6 can be set in either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, whereas the content of the result display corresponding to the data 5 is Of the first result display part AS and the second result display part BS, only the second result display part BS is set.

  In the normal jackpot stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), "0 to 4" among "0 to 9" set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the normal jackpot result. Corresponds to the stop result data of data 7, and “5 to 9” corresponds to the stop result data of data 8. In this case, in the stop result data of data 7, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “L.”. Further, in the stop result data of data 8, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “H.”.

  Here, as described above, when a normal jackpot result occurs, a game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and a game ball wins the lower operation port 34 when the game ball wins in the winning / losing lottery, One of the cases where the winner was won in the lottery. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 7 and the data 8 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  In the special outage stop result table, “157” out of “157,457” set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the special outage result is data as shown in FIG. 9 corresponds to the stop result data of “9”, and “457” corresponds to the stop result data of data 10. In this case, in the stop result data of data 9, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “2”. Further, in the stop result data of the data 10, the content of the number of rounds is “.”, And the content of the result display is “2.”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the special loss result is set so that the success / failure lottery mode can be generated in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Among these, in the former, since “157,457” is set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a special outage result, either the stop result data of the data 9 or the stop result data of the data 10 is selected. The On the other hand, in the latter case, since “157” is set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a special loss result, only the stop result data of the data 9 is selected.

  Further, the special losing result can be generated in any of the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 9 and the data 10 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  In the normal outage stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), among the values set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the normal outage result, the corresponding value of 299 or less Corresponding to the stop result data, the corresponding value of 300 or more corresponds to the stop result data of the data 12. In this case, in the stop result data of the data 11, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “−”. In the stop result data of the data 12, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “-.”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), the normal losing result is set so that the success / failure lottery mode can occur in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode. 1, either stop result data of data 11 or stop result data of data 12 is selected. In addition, the normal losing result can be generated in any of the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 11 and the data 12 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  As described above, different display contents are set for every game result regardless of whether or not a big hit occurs. As a result, when the game round is ended, the manager of the game hall can select the result display section in which the variable display related to the game round is performed among the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. By watching, it is possible to monitor what the game result of the game times is. In particular, since the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS provided in the main display unit 43 are display units that are directly controlled by the main control device 81, the sub display control device 212 performs display control. The display reliability is higher than that of the display unit which is interposed at the time.

  On the other hand, the contents of the number of rounds are common to “2”, which is the number of times that the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened, in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. Probability jackpot results and normal jackpot results are common to “F”. Thereby, the manager of the game hall, when the content of the stop result displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS when the game round ends is based on the jackpot result, By looking at the display content of the round display section RS, it is possible to monitor the number of times the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is subsequently opened. In particular, the round display unit RS provided in the main display unit 43 is a display unit that is directly displayed and controlled by the main control device 81. In comparison, the display reliability is high.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after the process of step S802 or step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S805 to S811, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big win are executed.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, in step S806, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 11A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is a numerical range of a normal jackpot result, a numerical range of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a numerical range of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot Determine which of the resulting numerical ranges is included.

  On the other hand, if the second result display unit flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 11B) in step S807. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  After the process of step S806 or step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probable jackpot result, in step S809, any stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round in which a probable jackpot result will occur. Execute the stop result setting process for probability variation jackpot to set whether to end the variable display at.

  The stop result setting process for probability variation big hit will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Here, as already described, in the distribution table for the first result display section, as the probability variation jackpot result, a plurality of types of game results including an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result. However, in the distribution table for the second result display section, only one type of 15R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, in the case where the current game time is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the first result display unit. In step S901, a negative determination may be made or an affirmative determination may be made. On the other hand, in the case where the current game time is based on the winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 34 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the second result display section. In step S901, an affirmative determination is always made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the distributed game result is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. If the result is an explicit 2R probability change jackpot result, the stop corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the stop result table for the explicit 2R probability change already described in step S903. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S904. Thereafter, in step S905, after storing (storing) the explicit 2R probability variation flag (explicit high probability correspondence information) in the explicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (explicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, The stop result setting process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, in step S906, the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change described above is referred to and the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is handled. The address information of the stop result data obtained is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S907. Thereafter, in step S908, the implicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (implicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is stored (stored). ), The stop result setting process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, in step S909, the stop corresponding to the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the stop result table for 15R probability change already described. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S910. After that, after storing (storing) the 15R probability variation flag (high probability correspondence special information) in the 15R probability variation flag storage area (high probability correspondence special information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S911, this stop The result setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of step S809, the process proceeds to step S813. On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, referring to the normal jackpot stop result table already described, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired, and the address information is obtained. The result is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S811, the normal big hit flag (low probability correspondence special information) is stored (stored) in the normal big hit flag storage area (low probability correspondence special information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and then this stop The result setting process ends. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S813.

  If the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S804, and the flow proceeds to step S812. In step S812, for the off time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that results in a losing result, and the variable display is ended. Execute the stop result setting process.

  The stop result setting process for detachment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is not the high probability mode, a special outage determination is made as to whether or not the current game result is a special outage result with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in step S1002. Specifically, does the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE match the value set as a special outage result in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 10 (a)? Determine whether or not. On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode, in step S1003, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the high probability mode. Specifically, does the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE match the value set as a special outage result in the high probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 10 (b)? Determine whether or not.

  Thereafter, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1002 or step S1003 is a special loss result. In the case of a special outage result, in steps S1005 to S1007, processing for setting a game result in the case of a special outage result, processing for setting a stop result, and the like are executed.

  In step S1005, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the special outage stop result table described above, and in step S1006. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. After that, in step S1007, the special outage flag (special outage correspondence information) is stored (stored) in the special outage flag storage area (special outage correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and then this stop result setting is performed. The process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the stop corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to in step S1008 with reference to the normal outage stop result table already described. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S1009. Thereafter, the stop result setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of step S812, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game time in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is executed.

  The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the RAM 204 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 202. In a succeeding step S1102, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 as the occurrence of reach display. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the occurrence of reach display is generated. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result. In the case of either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outlier result, the common variation display time table (common variation display time information group) stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 in step S1104 Referring to this, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S1105, the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time counter area (in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204). Set to variable display time measuring means). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the case of a special loss result under the normal gaming state and in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 The behavior of each movable object is common, and only the internal lottery state is different. In this case, in both cases of a special outlier result and an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a reach display will occur in the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41, and further, the variation of the game number By referring to the common variation display time table when determining the display time, the variation display time of the pattern in the result display unit and the symbol display device 41 becomes common.

  On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, a negative determination is made in step S1103, and the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, by referring to the other variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S1107. The variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the common hold number CRN is grasped. In a succeeding step S1109, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag (high frequency support information) is stored (stored) in the high frequency support flag storage area (high frequency support information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The high-frequency support flag is stored or deleted when the open / close execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process described later.

  If the high frequency support flag is not stored, in step S1110, the current change is referred to by referring to the variable display time table for low frequency support stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the type counter CS and the number of common pending numbers CRN is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 in step S1111. Thereafter, the setting process ends. Note that the variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of the common hold number CRN is larger.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is stored, in step S1112, the variable display time table for high frequency support stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to this time. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the number of common pending numbers CRN is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 in step S1113. Thereafter, the setting process ends. Note that the variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of the common hold number CRN is larger.

  As described above, when reach display does not occur, a special outage result is obtained under normal gaming conditions by changing the variable display time table to be referenced depending on whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. When the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the result display unit in the subsequent game times and the pattern change display time in the symbol display device 41 are common.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after step S813, a variation start command and a type command are set in step S814. The change start command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. In other words, the type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, special outage result information, etc. included.

  The variation start command and type command set in step S814 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). Based on the received change start command and type command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the variation display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variation display mode of the symbol is output from the voice lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Is done. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82 so that the symbol change display corresponding to each game time is performed.

  After that, in step S815, the variation display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 18), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24) as described above. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, display control is performed on the result display unit (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit according to the current game round. . As for the first result display section AS, for example, the first display segment A1 → the second display segment A2 →... → the seventh display segment A7 → the eighth display segment A8 → the first display segment A1 → In this order, the display segments A1 to A8 blink. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S608. Here, the variation end process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. In the following step S1202, stop result data corresponding to the address information confirmed in step S1201 is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the result display is determined from the specified stop result data. Check.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display section flag is not stored, the contents display section confirms that the result display confirmed in step S1202 is output to the first result display section AS in step S1204. Thereby, in the 1st result display part AS, the change display of a picture is complete | finished in the state by which the result display concerning the said output was stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, the content display unit confirms the result display confirmed in step S1202 in step S1205, and then ends this variation end process. To do. As a result, in the second result display section BS, the variation display of the pattern is terminated in a state where the result display related to the output is stopped.

  Here, the result display stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS in step S1204 and the result display stopped and displayed on the second result display unit BS in step S1205 are game time control in the next game time. The process is maintained until the change start process in step S605 is executed. That is, the MPU 202 maintains the content of the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS when one game round is completed until the next game round is started. As described above, each result display section AS, BS has a function of controlling display.

  The contents of the result display in the stop result data store information on display segments to be lit in the eight display segments A1 to A8 and B1 to B8. In this case, since the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS are both configured using eight display segments A1 to A8 and B1 to B8, the stop result data is first The result display part AS and the second result display part BS do not need to be set individually, and can be set as common.

  In the game times control process (FIG. 18), after executing the change end process, a change end command is set in step S609. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated. The change end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S1304. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed.

  In subsequent step S1305, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output. The contents of the number of rounds in the stop result data store information on display segments to be lit in the eight display segments R1 to R8.

  In a succeeding step S1306, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1307. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, if the high-frequency winning mode is set, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S1308.

  After executing the process of step S1307 or step S1308, an opening command is set in step S1309. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This opening command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received opening command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In the subsequent step S1310, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the non-explicit 2R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and any one of the flags is stored. In this case, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal 99a is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal 99a is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand that.

  Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. When the flag is stored, the signal output state of the jackpot and special out signal output terminal 99b is set to the jackpot and special out signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot and special miss signal output terminal 99b is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot and special miss signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a big winning opening / closing process is executed in step S1312. Here, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32c. If the big winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S1402 whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, and in step S1403, the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. Is determined.

  When the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” or when the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” and the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1404, and variable prize driving is performed to open the big prize opening 32a. The unit 32c is set in a driving state.

  In subsequent step S1405, setting processing for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set. In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, in step S1502, the first timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 has “15000” ( That is, 30 sec) is set. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started, that is, every 2 msec. In the subsequent step S1503, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 32a. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in step S1504, and the winning counter area is subsequently set in step S1505. Set “6” on the PC. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  After executing the setting process for each round in the big winning opening / closing process (FIG. 27), an opening command is set in step S1406, and the big winning opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This release command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received release command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the special winning opening is open, the process advances to step S1407 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. If the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S1409, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S1410. If it is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the value of the first timer area T1 is “0” in step S1407, or if the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S1410, it means that the big prize opening closing condition is satisfied. . In such a case, in step S1411, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set to a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening 32a.

  In the following step S1412, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1414 whether the high-frequency winning mode is set.

  In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1, and in the case of the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0. 0) is set in the first timer area T1. 2 sec) is set. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the time during which the large winning opening 32a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S1417, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This closing command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received closing command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1413 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S1418. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S1419, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This ending command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received ending command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 26), after executing the big prize opening / closing process in step S1312, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” in step S1313. In step S1314, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1315. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, in step S1602, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In the subsequent step S1603, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1604, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In the subsequent step S1605, a special advantageous start command (special advantageous state start information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the gaming state has shifted to the special advantageous state, It is set as a command to be transmitted to the lamp control device 82. The special advantageous start command is stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  The special advantageous start command set in step S1605 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received special advantageous start command, a process for making the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 correspond to the special advantageous gaming state is executed. This will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1606 whether or not the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored. If the high frequency support flag is not stored, steps S1608 to S1608 are performed. After executing each processing in step S1610, the migration processing is terminated. In this case, in step S1608, the flag erasing process is executed. In step S1609, a high probability mode flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In step S1610, a special advantageous end command (special advantageous state end information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the gaming state is not the special advantageous state, It is set as a command to be transmitted to the control device 82. The special advantageous end command is stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203.

  The special advantageous end command set in step S1610 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received special advantageous end command, processing for making the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 correspond to a gaming state other than the special advantageous gaming state. Run. This will be described in detail later.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1607, and after executing the processes in steps S1602 to S1605, the present migration process is terminated. In this case, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  If it is determined in step S1606 that the implicit 2R probability variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1611 whether the normal jackpot flag is stored. If the normal jackpot flag is stored, the flag erasure process is executed in step S1612. Thereafter, in step S1613, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1614, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, a transition is made to a normal game state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S1615, a special advantageous end command (special advantageous state end information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the gaming state is not the special advantageous state, It is set as a command to be transmitted to the device 82. The special advantageous end command is stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  The special advantageous end command set in step S1615 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received special advantageous end command, processing for making the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 correspond to a gaming state other than the special advantageous gaming state. Run. This will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S1611 that the normal jackpot flag is not stored, the migration process is terminated. In other words, when the result is a special losing result and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state of the game times resulting in the special losing result is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 26), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1315 is terminated, a round display termination process is performed in step S1316. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. That is, the round display in the round display unit RS is started when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In this case, when the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a is smaller and the opening time and closing time of the large winning opening 32a are set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. . Therefore, the period during which the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display portion RS is shorter than that in the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is started when the game round ends, and is continued until the next game round is started. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the result display starts before the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit RS and after the display of the content of the number of rounds is finished. Will continue. That is, the result display is maintained for a longer period than the display of the content of the number of rounds.

  Thereafter, in step S1317, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the open / close execution mode end processing, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special out flag are stored, they are erased and are not already stored. If so, keep that state.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the electric role support process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in an open state, and is erased when the state is returned to a closed state.

  If the in-support flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1702 to determine whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1703 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is “0”. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, it is determined in step S1704 whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 or not. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1705, after setting the out-of-line display, the main role support process is ended. By setting the out-of-display, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0” and it is not the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S1706 whether or not the value of the accessory reservation storage number SN is greater than “0”. When the value of the stored item reservation memory number SN is “0”, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the stored item storage number SN is larger than “0”, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in step S1707, and whether or not the high frequency support mode is determined in step S1708. .

  If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, the open lottery is performed in step S1709. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  In subsequent step S1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1709 is a support winning. If it is not a support win, the process proceeds to step S1712 without executing the process of step S1711. If it is a support win, a support win flag is stored in step S1711 and provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. After setting “3” in the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1712.

  In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the main role support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, it is determined in step S1713 whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If the game number counter area is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated. If the game number counter area is “0”, the high frequency support flag is erased in step S1714, and then the main role support process is terminated.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1715. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. Simultaneously with the open lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2.

  In the subsequent step S1716, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1715 is a support winning. If the support is not won, the main role support process is terminated. In the case of support winning, the support winning flag is stored in step S1717, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2, and then the main role supporting process is terminated.

  When the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, and the process proceeds to step S1718 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, since the variation display of the picture on the accessory display unit 44 is being performed, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, a win display is set in step S1719. As a result, the display of the variation of the pattern in the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the winning display is stopped. In the subsequent step S1720, the supporting flag is stored, and after the support winning flag is deleted, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If the in-support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1721, and after executing the electric combination opening / closing process for opening / closing the electric combination 34a, the electric combination support process is terminated. The electric role opening / closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is opened, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

  When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1803 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, and the second timer area T2 is set to “250” (that is, 0.5 sec). ) Is set.

  Thereafter, in step S1804, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated, and when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, the supporting flag is deleted. After that, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the electric accessory 34a is being opened, an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, and the flow proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the second timer area T2 is “0”, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the opened state is executed in step S1808.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode, and in step S1810, it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode is set, “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1811, and then the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, after setting “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer area T2 in step S1812, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. .

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 82 and Display Control Device 212>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 241 provided in the audio lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, the hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as the operation winning command, the shift command, the special advantageous start command, and the special advantageous end command which have already been described are received. In addition, a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change start command, a type command, and a change end command is received. Also, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command is received.

  As described above, the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp portion 63 and the speaker portion 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected.

  The ROM 243 includes a hold notification table storage area 245 that is referred to when determining whether the information included in the operation winning command received from the main control device 81 is information corresponding to the hold notification, and display control. A command information storage area 246 that stores various commands to be output to the device 212, and an effect content table storage area 247 that is referred to when determining the content of effects in each game time are set. Further, the RAM 244 has a command storage area 248 for temporarily storing commands received from the main control device 81, a hold counter area 249 used for performing light emission control of each of the hold lamp units 45 to 47, and An other flag storage area 250 used for executing various control processes is set. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored commands.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. Yes.

  The MPU 252 receives a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control, and a game time control command (game time control information) for performing variable display of symbols from the audio lamp control device 82. Then, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) for displaying a moving image during the open / close execution mode is received. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. In the program ROM 253, the notification generation lottery table storage area 261 referred to in the lottery whether or not to execute the predetermined notification in the hold display, and the notification content as the specific notification content when the predetermined notification is executed. An individual notification lottery table storage area 262 that is referred to when lottery is selected is set.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. In the work RAM 254, a command storage area 263 for temporarily storing commands received from the voice lamp control device 82, and a count for holding the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 in the MPU 252 are counted. Images to be displayed in the hold counter area 264 and the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 and Gb1 to Gb4 of the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb (see FIG. 8B) of the symbol display device 41. For holding display information setting area 265 for storing information for instructing VDP 255 and for generating a lottery for generating lottery acquisition information for lottery whether or not to execute the predetermined notification. Acquisition for lottery in the lottery of the counter area 266 and whether or not the notification content is the specific notification content when the predetermined notification is executed. Individual notification lottery counter area 267 for generating a multi-address, and other flag storage area 268, which is used to execute various control processes are set. The command storage area 263 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored commands.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like. The character ROM 256 has a holding image data storage area 269 that stores image data to be displayed in the first holding display area Ga and the second holding display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 as a part of the data. Has been.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257. In the video RAM 257, a first hold display area 271 corresponding to the first hold display area Ga and a second hold display area 281 corresponding to the second hold display area Gb are set.

  The first hold display area 271 includes a first unit area 272 and a second unit area 273 so as to correspond to the first to fourth unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in the first hold display area Ga on a one-to-one basis. A third unit area 274 and a fourth unit area 275 are set. In each unit hold display area Ga1 to Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga, an image corresponding to the data written in each unit area 272 to 275 is displayed. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 corresponding to the unit areas 272 to 275 in which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

  The second hold display area 281 includes a first unit area 282 and a second unit area 283 so as to correspond to the first to fourth unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 in the second hold display area Gb on a one-to-one basis. A third unit area 284 and a fourth unit area 285 are set. In each unit hold display area Gb1 to Gb4 of the first hold display area Gb, an image corresponding to the data written in each unit area 282 to 285 is displayed. In the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 corresponding to the unit areas 282 to 285 in which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<Command Corresponding Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 82>
Next, command response processing executed by the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the command received from the main control device 81 is stored in the command storage area 248 of the RAM 244 by the command storage process activated when the command is received. The command handling process is a process for executing various controls corresponding to commands stored in the command storage area 248, which are periodically activated (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) in the MPU 242.

  In the command response processing, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is an operation winning command. In step S1902, after executing the first corresponding process for executing the process corresponding to the stored operation winning command, this command corresponding process is terminated.

  Here, the first handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the first response process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the operation winning command received this time includes information corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation winning command received this time is a command transmitted from the main control device 81 in response to the winning of a game ball in the upper operation port 33. In the case of a command transmitted in response to a winning of a game ball in the upper working port 33, the first hold increase time process in steps S2002 to S2010 is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a command transmitted in response to a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34, the second on-hold increase processing in steps S2011 to S2012 is executed.

  In the first hold increase processing, first, in step S2002, the voice side first hold storage number IaN1 stored in the hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. The voice side first hold memory number IaN1 corresponds to the first hold lamp unit 45, and the first hold lamp unit 45 is controlled to be turned on according to the voice side first hold memory number IaN1. The first hold lamp unit 45 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the first hold storage number IaN1 on the voice side is 1, the first hold lamp unit 45 on the left end is turned on and the first on the voice side If the reserved storage number IaN1 is 4, the first hold lamp unit 45 up to the right end is turned on.

  In subsequent step S2003, based on the information included in the operation winning command received this time, whether or not the hold information in main controller 81 related to the operation winning command corresponds to the jackpot result to be notified and A specific process for holding notification for specifying the type of the jackpot result to be notified is executed. That is, first, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included in the operation winning command are grasped. Thereafter, referring to the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that have been grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot result to be notified. And, if corresponding, the type of the jackpot result of the notification target is specified. Then, the identification result is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242.

  In this regard, the MPU 242 specifies whether or not the grasp processing execution function for grasping the hold notification specifying information and the grasped hold notification specifying information coincide with the information corresponding to the jackpot result to be notified. A jackpot result correspondence specifying function, a type specifying function for specifying the type of the jackpot result of the notification target when specifying that it corresponds to the jackpot result of the notification target, and the type of the jackpot result of the notification target And a type storage function for storing.

  An outline of the specific processing content of step S2003 will be described. As described above, the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 is referred to when the jackpot result correspondence specification and the type specification are performed. Here, the hold notification table storage area 245 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The hold notification table storage area 245 includes a first table shown in FIG. 35A and a second table shown in FIG. In the first table, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is associated with the first specific result. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode in the winning / not-winning lottery in the main controller 81, the first specific result is the common jackpot result. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning only in the high probability mode in the winning lottery in the main control device 81, the first specific result is a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change ( In other words, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value other than the above, the first specific result is set to be a non-notification result. ing.

  In the second table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the second identification result. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value that normally results in a jackpot result in the sorting table for the first result display unit in the main control device 81 (the sorting table corresponding to the upper operation port 33), The second specific result is set to be a normal jackpot result, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is set to a distribution table for the first result display section in the main controller 81 (the distribution corresponding to the upper operation port 33). Table), the second specific result is set to be the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value other than the above. The second specific result is set to be a result not to be notified.

  That is, as the notification target jackpot result, the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set, and the types of the notification target jackpot result are the normal jackpot result, the common jackpot result in the case of the normal jackpot result, A jackpot result dedicated to the probability change in the case of a normal jackpot result, a common jackpot result in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result can be set. However, in the pachinko machine 10, among the above, four types of notifications are provided: a normal jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a common jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a dedicated jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result. Set as a jackpot result for the subject.

  In step S2003, with reference to the first table, it is identified which of the first identification results the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 among the information included in the operation winning command received this time corresponds. At the same time, referring to the second table, it is determined which second identification result corresponds to the value information of the jackpot type counter C2 among the information included in the operation winning command received this time. . Then, the first specified result information and the second specified result information that are specified are stored in the register of the MPU 242. Note that if the specified information can be referred to in the subsequent processing, whether or not the information is stored in the register of the MPU 242 is arbitrary. For example, the information may be stored in the RAM 244.

  Here, the specific process for holding notification will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold notification specific process, first, in step S2101, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the current operation winning command is grasped. In subsequent step S2102, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time with reference to the first table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 is the notification target jackpot. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to either the common jackpot result set as a result or the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change.

  In subsequent step S2103, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2102 is a common jackpot result. If it is a common jackpot result, the common jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 in step S2104. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  If it is not the common jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2105, and it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2102 is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. If it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, this specific process is terminated as it is. In the case of the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, in step S2106, the jackpot information dedicated to the probability change is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2107, information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included in the current operation winning command is grasped. In subsequent step S2108, referring to the second table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, the information of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time is the notification target jackpot. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result set as a result.

  In subsequent step S2109, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2108 is a normal jackpot result. If it is a normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 in step S2110. Then, this specific process is complete | finished.

  If it is not the normal jackpot result, the process advances to step S2111 to determine whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2108 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. If it is not the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the present specific process is terminated as it is. If the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the 15R probability variation jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 in step S2112. Then, this specific process is complete | finished.

  Returning to the description of the first response process (FIG. 34), after executing the hold notification specific process in step S2003, the processes in and after step S2004 are executed. In this case, in step S2004, based on the information on the first specific result and the information on the second specific result stored in the register of the MPU 242, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot result to be notified. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either common jackpot information or probability change dedicated jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, the normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is determined. It is determined whether any one is stored. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the result is the 15R probability variation jackpot result based on the information on the second specific result stored in the register of the MPU 242. Specifically, it is determined whether 15R probability variation jackpot information is stored. Further, in step S2006, it is determined based on the information on the first specific result stored in the register of the MPU 242 whether or not it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. Specifically, it is determined whether either normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, is the jackpot information dedicated to probability change stored? Determine whether or not.

  As a result, if it is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability variation dedicated jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S2004 to S2006, and the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the first hold increase command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the first hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  If it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004 and step S2005, a negative determination is made in step S2006, and the flow proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the second hold increase command is selected from the various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the second hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  If the result is a normal jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, a negative determination is made in step S2005, and the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2009, the third hold increase command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the third hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  If the result is not a notification target, a negative determination is made in step S2004, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, the fourth hold increase command is selected from the various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the fourth hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  In the second on-hold increase processing, first, in step S2011, the voice-side second on-hold storage number IbN1 stored in the on-hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. The voice side second reserved memory number IbN1 corresponds to the second reserved lamp unit 46, and the second reserved lamp unit 46 is controlled to be lighted according to the voice side second reserved memory number IbN1. The second hold lamp unit 46 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the second hold number IbN1 on the voice side is 1, the second hold lamp unit 46 on the left end is turned on and the second on the voice side If the reserved storage number IbN1 is 4, the second hold lamp unit 46 up to the right end is turned on.

  In the subsequent step S2012, the lower hold increase command is selected from the various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the lower hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 33), if the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is not an operation winning command, a negative determination is made in step S1901, and step The process proceeds to S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is a shift command. If the command is a shift command, a process corresponding to the stored shift command is executed in step S1904. After executing the second response process for executing the command, the command response process is terminated.

  Here, the second handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the second handling process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the shift command received this time includes information indicating that the upper working port 33 is supported. That is, it is determined whether or not the shift command received this time is a command transmitted in response to a data shift with respect to the first result display section holding area Ra corresponding to the upper operation port 33 in the main control device 81. . In the case of a command transmitted in response to a data shift with respect to the first result display section reservation area Ra corresponding to the upper operation port 33, the first hold reduction processing in steps S2202 to S2203 is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a command transmitted in response to a data shift with respect to the second result display section reservation area Rb corresponding to the lower operation port 34, the second hold reduction processing in steps S2204 to S2205 is executed. .

  In the first hold decrease process, first, in step S2202, the voice side first hold storage number IaN1 stored in the hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is decremented by 1. In this case, the first hold lamp unit 45 is controlled to be turned off according to the voice side first hold storage number IaN1. In this turn-off control, contrary to the turn-on control, the first holding lamp unit 45 is turned off in order from the right side.

  In the subsequent step S2203, the upper hold decrease command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the upper hold decrease command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the second correspondence process is terminated.

  In the second hold decreasing process, first, in step S2204, the voice side second hold storage number IbN1 stored in the hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is decremented by 1. In this case, the second hold lamp unit 46 is controlled to be extinguished according to the voice-side second hold storage number IbN1. In this turn-off control, contrary to the turn-on control, the second holding lamp unit 46 is turned off sequentially from the right side.

  In the subsequent step S2205, the lower hold decrease command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the lower hold decrease command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the second correspondence process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 33), if the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is not a shift command, a negative determination is made in step S1903, The process proceeds to S1905. In step S1905, it is determined whether the command to be read this time is either a special advantageous start command or a special advantageous end command. If it is a special advantageous start command or a special end command, in step S1906, After executing the third response process for executing the process corresponding to the stored command, the command response process is terminated.

  In the third response process, when the special advantageous start command is received, the MPU 242 specifies that the gaming state is the special advantageous gaming state, and when the special advantageous end command is received, the gaming state Is determined not to be in the special advantageous gaming state in the MPU 242. When a special advantageous start command is received, a command maintaining the information form as it is, that is, a special advantageous start command is transmitted to the display control device 212. If a special advantageous end command has been received, a command maintaining the information form as it is, that is, a special advantageous end command is transmitted to the display control device 212.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 33), if the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is not a special advantageous command, a negative determination is made in step S1905, The process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether there is another command to be read this time. If there is no command to be read, this command handling process is terminated. If there is a command to be read, in step S1908, after executing a fourth corresponding process for executing a process corresponding to the stored command, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  Here, the fourth response process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the fourth response process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a change start command and a type command are received from the main control device 81. If a change start command and a type command have been received, whether or not information indicating that either an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result occurs is included in the received type command in step S2302. Determine whether. When either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outlier result occurs, in step S2303, the change start command is referred to with reference to the common effect content table stored in the effect content table storage area 247 of the ROM 243. The content of the effect corresponding to the information of the variable display time included in the is determined, and the content of the effect is set in step S2304. Thereafter, the fourth corresponding process ends.

  In this case, the production contents include the light emission mode of the display lamp unit 63 and the output mode of the speaker unit 64, and the symbol variation mode in the symbol display device 41. The symbol variation mode includes symbol variation display time, presence / absence of reach display, reach display start timing, type of reach effect, final stop symbol combination information, and the like. Each game time effect is executed in accordance with the effect content set in step S2304. Among these, the pattern variation mode in the symbol display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82 so that the symbol change display corresponding to each game time is performed.

  Here, in the case where the result is a special loss result as described above and the case where the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, by referring to the common effect content table, the change in the symbol on the symbol display device 41 when both game results are obtained. It is possible to share the display mode. Specifically, it is possible to share the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41, the reach effect, the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed, and the like. By the way, in this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a special outlier result and in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a combination of symbols with the same number is not stopped and displayed with a different number. The displayed symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this case, the combination of symbols is a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed even when the result is a normal off result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a combination of symbols for common display that is not stopped and displayed in the case of a result that is not normal.

  As described above, by sharing the symbol variation display mode, the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the lower operation port 34 are obtained in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result in a normal gaming state or a special outage result. In addition to the common behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the electric accessory 34a, the behavior in the display for production is also common. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode occurs under the normal gaming state, it is possible to make the player imagine whether or not the success / failure lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode thereafter. Become.

  As already described, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is reached, the combination of symbols with the same odd number is stopped and displayed, and when the normal jackpot result is obtained, the same even number is assigned. The displayed symbol combination is stopped and displayed. However, in the former, after the combination of symbols with the same even number is once stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols with the same odd number is given in the game round or in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure which can produce the effect which switches the content of a stop display. Furthermore, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a combination of symbols with different numbers is stopped and displayed in a different manner from the case of a special outlier result and the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. .

  On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, a negative determination is made in step S2302, and the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, referring to the other effect content table stored in the effect content table storage area 247 of the ROM 243, the effect content corresponding to the information on the change display time included in the change start command is determined. In step S2306, the contents of the effect are set. Thereafter, the fourth corresponding process ends.

  The other effect content tables may be different for each game result, or some or all of them may be common. Moreover, you may change the production content table to refer by whether the support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is a high frequency support mode. In this case, in the normal gaming state, when the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, the symbol variable display mode on the symbol display device 41 in the subsequent game times is made common. Is possible. Further, the effect content table to be referred to may be changed depending on whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this case, for example, by changing the contents of the reach display that is easy to select between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result is obtained under the normal gaming state. In this case, it becomes possible to slightly change the display variation pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 in the subsequent game rounds, and whether or not the high probability mode is determined from the contents of the reach display generated in the symbol display device 41. Can be predicted by the player. However, even in this case, the variable display time may be the same in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and in the case of a special outlier result.

  If no change start command and type command have been received, it is determined in step S2307 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, after setting the opening effect in step S2308, the fourth corresponding process ends. When setting the opening effect, the effect contents set for the high-frequency winning mode are different from those for the low-frequency winning mode.

  Specifically, in the case of the high-frequency winning mode, the opening contents in the opening / closing execution mode are set. In this case, an opening video is set as the display content of the symbol display device 41. Further, in the case of the low frequency winning mode, the effect contents for the opening / closing execution mode in the low frequency winning mode are set. In this case, as a display content of the symbol display device 41, a series of moving images are set from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It should be noted that the setting of the moving image only needs to be at least common in the case of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the case of the special outlier result. In the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, different movie settings are performed. Also good.

  If the opening command has not been received, it is determined in step S2309 whether an ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, after setting the ending effect in step S2310, the fourth corresponding process ends. The setting of the ending effect is performed only in the high-frequency winning mode. In this case, an ending video is set as the display content of the symbol display device 41.

  If the ending command has not been received, after performing other setting processes in step S2311, the fourth corresponding process is terminated. In the other setting process, for example, on the condition that the high-frequency winning mode is set, the effect content corresponding to the opening command and the effect content corresponding to the closing command are set. When the change end command is received, the command is transmitted to the display control device 212 so that the stop result that has already been stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<On Hold Notification Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 212>
Next, the hold notification control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The hold notification control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle). In the hold notification control process, a process corresponding to the hold display control command among the commands stored in the command storage area 263 is executed. Note that the command received from the voice lamp control device 82 is stored in the command storage area 263 of the work RAM 254 by a command storage process activated when the command is received.

  In the hold notification control process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is a hold increase command, and is a hold increase command. In step S2402 to step S2410, the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 and Gb1 to Gb4 of the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb (see FIG. 8B) of the symbol display device 41 are set. A setting process for holding increase is executed to set information for instructing the VDP 255 to display an image to be displayed.

  In the hold increase setting process, the hold display information is set for the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254. Here, the hold display information setting area 265 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the hold display information setting area 265 includes a first hold display information setting area 291 corresponding to the first hold display area Ga and a second hold display information corresponding to the second hold display area Gb. A setting area 294.

  The hold display information set in the first hold display information setting area 291 is stored in the VDP 255 in an internal command (internal instruction information) output process that is a part of a plurality of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252. In the VDP 255, the image data corresponding to the internal command is selected from the hold image data storage area 269 of the character ROM 256 and set in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, the hold image is displayed in each of the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga. The internal command output process will be described later in detail.

  In the first hold display information setting area 291, two combinations of the first unit setting area to the fourth unit setting area are provided. That is, the first hold display information setting area 291 includes a hold notification permission area 292 and a hold notification disabling area 293, each of which includes a set of first unit setting area to fourth unit setting. Areas 292a to 292d and 293a to 293d are provided.

  Here, as the state of the hold display in the first hold display area Ga corresponding to the upper operation port 33, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information stored in the main control device 81 is information corresponding to the jackpot result to be notified. Is set to a hold notification permission state in which it can be notified and a hold notification disabled state in which the notification is disabled.

  In the hold notification permission area 292, hold display information for specifying image data to be set in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257 in the hold notification permission state is set. In the hold notification permission state, the hold display information set in the hold notification permission area 292 in the internal command output process described later is output to the VDP 255. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 292a is set in the first unit area 272, and the image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit setting area 292b is the first. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit area 273 and set in the third unit setting area 292c is set in the third unit area 274 and the hold display information set in the fourth unit setting area 292d. Corresponding image data is set in the fourth unit area 275.

  In the hold notification impossible area 293, hold display information for specifying the image data set in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257 in the hold notification disabled state is set. In the hold notification disabled state, the hold display information set in the hold notification disabled area 293 in the internal command output process described later is output to the VDP 255. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 293a is set in the first unit area 272, and the image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit setting area 293b is the first. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit area 273 and set in the third unit setting area 293c is set in the third unit area 274 and the hold display information set in the fourth unit setting area 293d. Corresponding image data is set in the fourth unit area 275.

  In addition, the hold display information set in the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, and the VDP 255 stores image data corresponding to the internal command in the character ROM 256. The selection is made from the image data storage area 269 and set for the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, the hold image is displayed in each of the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the second hold display area Gb.

  In the second hold display information setting area 294, a set of first unit settings so as to correspond one-to-one to the first unit area 282 to the fourth unit area 285 in the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. An area 294a to a fourth unit setting area 294d are provided. In this case, image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 294a is set in the first unit area 282, and image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit setting area 294b is set. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit area 283 and set in the third unit setting area 294c is set in the third unit area 284 and the hold display information set in the fourth unit setting area 294d. Is set in the fourth unit area 285.

  In the hold increase setting process, first, in step S2402, it is determined whether or not the hold increase command received this time includes information corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. Specifically, it is determined whether the hold increase command received this time is one of a first hold increase command, a second hold increase command, a third hold increase command, or a fourth hold increase command. If it is one of the first to fourth pending increase commands, an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, and the flow proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403, the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 stored in the reserved counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is incremented by one. The display-side first hold storage number IaN2 corresponds to the first hold display information setting area 291 of the hold display information setting area 265, and when the hold display information is set for reception of the hold increase command. Is set to the unit setting areas 292a to 292d and 293a to 293d corresponding to the display-side first hold storage number IaN2 in the first hold display information setting area 291.

  In a succeeding step S2404, a notification display suspending display information setting process is executed. Specifically, among the first unit setting area 293a to the fourth unit setting area 293d in the hold notification disabling area 293 of the first hold display information setting area 291, the display side first that is incremented by 1 in step S2403. The normal hold display information is set in the unit setting areas 293a to 293d corresponding to the hold storage number IaN2. For example, if the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 1, the normal hold display information is set for the first unit setting area 293a. If the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 4, the fourth The normal hold display information is set for the unit setting area 293d. In the internal command output process described later, the normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255, so that the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit hold in the first hold display area Ga. An image “●” is displayed in the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  Thereafter, in steps S2405 to S2408, a hold display information setting process for permitting notification is executed. That is, in step S2405, a notification generation lottery process is executed. In the notification generation lottery process, first, a notification generation lottery counter value is read from the notification generation lottery counter area 266 of the work RAM 254. Here, the notification generation lottery counter area 266 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the hold notification control process is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the notification generation lottery process, the notification generation lottery table read out corresponds to the notification generation lottery with reference to the notification generation lottery table stored in the notification generation lottery table storage area 261 of the program ROM 253. It is determined whether or not. Although the probability of being informed generation winning is arbitrary, in this pachinko machine 10, the informing generation lottery table is set so as to be informed generation winning with a probability of 9/10.

  In a succeeding step S2406, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2405 is a notification generation winning. If it is a notification generation winning, a hold display information setting process at the time of winning is executed in step S2407.

  The hold display information setting process at the time of winning will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, in the hold display information setting process at the time of winning, among the first unit setting area 292a to the fourth unit setting area 292d in the hold notification permitting area 292 of the first hold display information setting area 291, the above step S2403 is performed. In the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1, the hold display information corresponding to the type of the hold increase command received this time is set. For example, if the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 1, the display information is set for the first unit setting area 292a. If the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 4, the fourth unit The hold display information is set in the setting area 292d.

  In the hold display information setting process at the time of winning, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the hold increase command received this time is the first hold increase command. If it is the first hold increase command, an individual notification lottery process is executed in step S2502.

  In the individual notification lottery process, first, the individual notification lottery counter value is read from the individual notification lottery counter area 267 of the work RAM 254. Here, the individual notification lottery counter area 267 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 199”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the hold notification control process is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the individual notification lottery process, the individual notification lottery table read out corresponds to the individual notification lottery with reference to the individual notification lottery table stored in the individual notification lottery table storage area 262 of the program ROM 253. It is determined whether or not. The probability of winning the individual notification is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the individual notification lottery table is set so that the individual notification is won with a probability of 1/2.

  In subsequent step S2503, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2502 is an individual notification winning. If it is not the individual notification winning, in step S2504, the first notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. When the first notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process described later, the first notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga is set. A “certain” image is displayed in the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  On the other hand, in the case of individual notification winning, in step S2505, second notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. To do. The second notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, whereby the second notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga is set. An image “definitely dedicated” is displayed in the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  Here, as described above, the first hold increase command is newly stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. This is a command that is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 when the hold information is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability variation dedicated jackpot result. In this case, the case where the individual notification winning is performed in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a notification is made that the probability variation dedicated jackpot result is informed. On the other hand, the case where the individual notification is not won in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where only the fact that the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result is notified. The “definitely” image corresponds to the former notification, and the “definite” image corresponds to the latter notification.

  If the hold increase command received this time is not the first hold increase command, a negative determination is made in step S2501, and whether the hold increase command received this time is the second hold increase command in step S2506. Determine whether or not. If it is the second pending increase command, an individual notification lottery process is executed in step S2507. The contents of the individual notification lottery process are the same as in step S2502.

  In a succeeding step S2508, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2507 is an individual notification winning. If it is not the individual notification winning, the first notification information is set in step S2509 for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403.

  On the other hand, in the case of individual notification winning, in step S2510, third notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. To do. The third notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, so that the third notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga. In the on-hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, the “probably common” image is displayed.

  Here, as already described, the second hold increase command is newly stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the main control device 81 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. This is a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 when the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result. In this case, the case where the individual notification winning is performed in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where the hold information is notified that the 15R probability variation jackpot result is not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result. On the other hand, the case where the individual notification is not won in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where only the fact that the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result is notified. The “probably common” image corresponds to the former notification, and the “probable” image corresponds to the latter notification.

  If the hold increase command received this time is not the second hold increase command, a negative determination is made in step S2506, and whether the hold increase command received this time is the third hold increase command in step S2511. Determine whether or not. If it is the third hold increase command, in step S2512 the fourth notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first hold storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. After that, the hold display information setting process at the time of true selection is terminated. When the fourth notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process described later, the fourth notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga is set. In the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, a “success” image is displayed.

  Here, as already explained, the third hold increase command is newly stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the main control device 81 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. This is a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 when the hold information is a normal jackpot result. Therefore, the case where the third hold increase command is received is a case where the hold information is notified that it is a normal jackpot result. The “communication” image corresponds to this notification.

  If the hold increase command received this time is not the third hold increase command, it means that the hold increase command received this time is the fourth hold increase command. Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S2511, and in step S2513, normal hold display information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first hold memory number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. After that, the hold display information setting process at the time of true selection is terminated. The normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, whereby the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit hold in the first hold display area Ga. An image “●” is displayed in the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  Returning to the description of the hold notification control process (FIG. 39), if the result of the lottery process in step S2405 is not a notification generation win, a hold display information setting process at the time of losing is executed in step S2408. In the hold display information setting process at the time of detachment, after the normal hold display information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first hold memory number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403, the true selection is performed. End the hold display information setting process. The normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, whereby the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit hold in the first hold display area Ga. An image “●” is displayed in the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  On the other hand, if the pending increase command received this time does not include information corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33, a negative determination is made in step S2402, and the flow proceeds to step S2409.

  In step S2409, the display-side second reserved storage number IbN2 stored in the reserved counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is incremented by one. The display-side second reserved storage number IbN2 corresponds to the second hold display information setting area 294 of the hold display information setting area 265, and when the hold display information is set for reception of the hold increase command. In the second hold display information setting area 294, the hold display information is set in the unit setting areas 294a to 294d corresponding to the display-side second hold storage number IbN2.

  In a succeeding step S2410, a hold display information setting process for the lower working port is executed. Specifically, among the first unit setting area 294a to the fourth unit setting area 294d in the second hold display information setting area 294, it corresponds to the display-side second hold storage number IbN2 incremented by 1 in step S2409. Normal hold display information is set in the unit setting areas 294a to 294d. For example, if the display-side second reserved memory number IbN2 is 1, the normal hold display information is set for the first unit setting area 294a, and if the display-side second reserved memory number IbN2 is 4, the fourth The normal hold display information is set in the unit setting area 294d. In the internal command output process described later, the normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255, whereby the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 282 to 285, and the corresponding unit hold in the second hold display area Gb. An image of “●” is displayed in the display areas Gb1 to Gb4.

  If it is a command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is not a pending increase command, a negative determination is made in step S2401, and the flow proceeds to step S2411. In step S2411, it is determined whether the command to be read this time is a pending decrease command. In the case of the hold reduction command, in step S2412 to step S2415, the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb (see FIG. 8B) of the symbol display device 41 are displayed. A setting process for holding reduction is performed to shift the images displayed on Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 in accordance with the reduction of the holding information.

  In the hold reduction setting process, first, in step S2412, it is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the upper operation port 33 is included in the hold reduction command received this time. If the information corresponding to the upper operating port 33 is included, the display side first reserved storage number IaN2 stored in the reserved counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is decremented by 1 in step S2413.

  In a succeeding step S2414, a first shift process is executed. In the first shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 292a to the fourth unit setting area 292d of the hold notification permission area 292 in the first hold display information setting area 291 is moved to the lower area side. In addition to shifting in order, the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 293a to the fourth unit setting area 293d of the hold notification disabling area 293 in the first hold display information setting area 291 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. It is a process to make.

  Specifically, the hold display information in each first unit setting area 292a, 293a is cleared, and each second unit setting area 292b, 293b → each first unit setting area 292a, 293a, each third unit setting area 292c. , 293c → second unit setting areas 292b, 293b, fourth unit setting areas 292d, 293d → third unit setting areas 292c, 293c, etc. Information is shifted.

  In the output process of the internal command to be described later after the first shift process, each hold display information of the hold notification permission area 292 or the hold notification disabling area 293 is output to the VDP 255, whereby the first hold display for the video RAM 257 is performed. The image data of the unit areas 272 to 275 of the area 271 is updated. Thereby, the images displayed in the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga are also shifted to the lower side.

  On the other hand, when the information corresponding to the upper operation port 33 is not included in the hold decrease command received this time, a negative determination is made in step S2412 and the process proceeds to step S2415. In step S2415, the display-side second reserved storage number IbN2 stored in the hold counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is decremented by one.

  In a subsequent step S2416, a second shift process is executed. The second shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 294a to the fourth unit setting area 294d of the second hold display information setting area 294 to the lower area side.

  Specifically, the hold display information in the first unit setting area 294a is cleared, and the second unit setting area 294b → first unit setting area 294a, third unit setting area 294c → second unit setting area 294b, fourth The hold display information in each of the unit setting areas 294a to 294d is shifted, for example, from the unit setting area 294d to the third unit setting area 294c.

  In the internal command output process to be described later after the second shift process, each hold display information in the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255, whereby each of the second hold display area 281 in the video RAM 257 is output. The image data in the unit areas 282 to 285 is updated. Thereby, the images displayed in the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the second hold display area Gb are also shifted to the lower side.

  If it is a command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is not a pending decrease command, a negative determination is made in step S2411 and the process proceeds to step S2417. In step S2417, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is a special advantageous start command.

  If it is a special advantageous start command, in step S2418, a hold notification permission flag (hold notification notification permission) is stored in a hold notification permission flag storage area (hold notification permission information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 268 of the work RAM 254. Information) is stored, or when it is already stored, this state is maintained, and then the hold notification control process is terminated. The state in which the hold notification permission flag is stored, that is, the situation in which the game state is in the special advantageous state or the game execution state in which the game state is in the special advantageous state is in the opening / closing execution mode is described above. In this case, the hold notification permissible state is set. In this case, in the internal command output process described later, each hold display information set in the hold notification permission area 292 is output to the VDP 255 for the first hold display information setting area 291. The Therefore, in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, a notification for clearly indicating the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is performed, and A hold notification according to the content of the hold information is performed. In other words, the hold notification according to the content of the hold information is performed in a state in which the order of determination of the success / failure is specified.

  On the other hand, if it is not a special advantageous start command, it is determined in step S2419 whether or not the command to be read this time is a special advantageous end command. If it is not a special advantageous end command, the on-hold notification control process is ended as it is.

  If it is a special advantageous end command, in step S2420, if the hold notification permission flag is erased from the hold notification permission flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 268 of the work RAM 254, or if it has not already been stored. After the state is maintained, the hold notification control process is terminated. A state in which the hold notification permission flag is not stored, that is, a situation in which the game state is not in the special advantageous state and a state in which the game operation is in the special advantageous state is not in the opening / closing execution mode is the above-described hold notification impossible state, In this case, in the internal command output process to be described later, each hold display information set in the hold notification disabling area 293 is output to the VDP 255 with respect to the first hold display information setting area 291. Therefore, in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, a notification for clearly indicating the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is performed. The hold notification according to the content of the hold information is not performed.

<Regarding Output Process of Internal Command Executed by Display Control Device 212>
Next, an internal command output process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The internal command output process is a part of a plurality of processes repeatedly executed by the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle). In the internal command output process, the hold notification permission area 292 of the first hold display information setting area 291 and the hold notification of the first hold display information setting area 291 in the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 are displayed. The area to be output of the internal command is specified from the unavailable area 293 and the second hold display information setting area 294, and each hold set in the first to fourth unit setting areas of the specified area A process for outputting an internal command including the contents of the display information to the VDP 255 is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a hold notification permission flag is stored in the work RAM 254. When the hold notification permission flag is stored, that is, when the hold notification permission state is set, in step S2602, the area to which the internal command is output is the hold notification permission for the first hold display information setting area 291. The area 292 is specified. Then, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set at that time in the first to fourth unit setting areas 292a to 292d of the hold notification permission area 292 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 272 to 275 in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 1st reservation display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, while notifying in order to specify the number of reservation information stored in reservation area Ra for the 1st result display part of main controller 81, it performs. A hold notification corresponding to the contents of the hold information is performed. In other words, the hold notification according to the content of the hold information is performed in a state in which the order of determination of the success / failure is specified.

  Here, when the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 occurs, the main control device 81 transmits an operation winning command to the sound lamp control device 82 when the occurrence of the winning is specified. The voice lamp control device 82 executes the above-described command response process (FIG. 33) at a relatively short cycle such as 2 msec. When an operation winning command is received, a corresponding hold increase command is immediately received. It is transmitted to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, as described above, the hold notification control process and the internal command output process are executed in a relatively short cycle such as a 2 msec cycle. Therefore, when a game ball is won in the upper operating port 33 in a situation where the symbol display is performed in the predetermined game times on the symbol display device 41, a hold notification is started during the symbol variation display. Is possible.

  On the other hand, if the hold notification permission flag is not stored, that is, if the hold notification is disabled, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, the output target area of the internal command is identified as the hold notification disabled area 293 of the first hold display information setting area 291. Then, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set in the first to fourth unit setting areas 293a to 293d of the hold notification disabled area 293 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 272 to 275 in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 1st reservation display area Ga of the symbol display apparatus 41, the alert | report for specifying the number of the hold information stored in the 1st result display part reservation area Ra of the main control apparatus 81 is performed. However, the hold notification according to the contents of the hold information is not performed.

  After executing the process of step S2602 or step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, the output target area of the internal command is specified as the second hold display information setting area 294. Then, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set at that time in the first to fourth unit setting areas 294a to 294d of the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 282 to 285 in the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 2nd reservation display area Gb of the symbol display apparatus 41, the alert | report for specifying the number of the hold information stored in the 2nd result display part reservation area Rb of the main controller 81 is performed. However, the hold notification according to the content of the hold information is not performed. Thereafter, the output process of this internal command is terminated.

<Regarding the state of hold notification performed in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41>
Next, the state of hold notification performed in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, as already explained, the hold notification is performed in the case of the hold notification allowable state, and the hold notification allowable state is a state in which the gaming state is in the special advantageous state or in the game times in which the gaming state is in the special advantageous state. This is the situation when transitioning. In the following description, the gaming state is a special advantageous state, that is, the winning / non-winning lottery mode in the main control device 81 is the high probability mode, and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is the high frequency support mode. The explanation is based on the premise.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a jackpot result dedicated to probability change (a common jackpot result). )) Is shown on hold. In this case, the hold information that is the 15R probability change jackpot result and not the probability change dedicated jackpot result is the second hold information in the upper working port 33, and therefore the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga. Is displayed on the hold notification image of “probably common”.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, the player can play the game times corresponding to the hold information regardless of whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It can be recognized that a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs. In this case, the current gaming state is that the support mode of the lower working port 34 by the electric accessory 34a is the high frequency support mode, so that winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34 occurs relatively frequently, With regard to the hold information that is a trigger for starting the game round, the hold information relating to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 is prioritized over the hold information relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33. Furthermore, since the current lottery mode is the high probability mode in the current gaming state, the game times related to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 are some jackpot results, specifically, the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result. The probability of becoming is relatively high.

  Then, the player operates the lower operation while expecting that a big hit result will be generated in the game times related to winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 34 before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification. It is considered that the firing handle 54 is operated in expectation of winning a prize in the mouth 34. This is because if a jackpot result is generated in the game times related to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34, the player will be in a state where the two jackpot results are secured in one special advantageous state.

  FIG. 43 (b) notifies the holding that the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. It shows how it is. In this case, since the hold information which is the 15R probability change jackpot result and the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change is the fourth hold information in the upper working port 33, the fourth unit hold display area of the first hold display area Ga. An on-hold notification image “definitely dedicated” is displayed on Ga4.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, if the player becomes a game number corresponding to the hold information, and if the winning lottery mode at that time is the high probability mode, a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated. However, it is possible to recognize that the big hit result does not occur if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. In other words, in the current special advantageous state, if the game times correspond to the hold information related to the hold notification, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is surely generated, while the game times related to winning a game ball to the lower operating port 34 If the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification after the normal jackpot result is generated, it can be recognized that the 15R probability variable jackpot result that has been obtained cannot be obtained.

  Then, in order to prevent another jackpot result from being generated before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification, the player receives a new game ball winning in the lower operation port 34. It is considered that the operation of the firing handle 54 is stopped so as not to occur.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is on hold notification that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. In this case, since the hold information which is the 15R probability variation jackpot result is the third hold information in the upper operation port 33, the hold notification of “probability” is given to the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga. Is displayed.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, the player can reliably generate a 15R probability variation jackpot result if the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification are present in the current special advantageous state. It is unclear whether or not a 15R probability variable jackpot result will be generated if the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification after the normal jackpot result has occurred in the game times related to winning the game ball to the mouth 34 Can be recognized.

  Then, the player who predicted that the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result expects the game ball to win the lower operating port 34 as in FIG. 43 (a). The player who is considered to operate the firing handle 54 and predicts that the hold information is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability variation dedicated jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b). It is considered that the operation 54 is stopped. That is, the launch handle 54 is operated according to the player's prediction, and the game can be diversified through the hold notification.

  FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main controller 81 is on hold notification that it is a normal jackpot result. In this case, since the hold information which is the normal jackpot result is the fourth hold information in the upper working port 33, a hold notification of “communication” is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga. An image is displayed.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, the player can determine that a jackpot result is normally generated at least when the game times correspond to the hold information in the current special advantageous state. . If a normal jackpot result occurs in the special advantageous state, the high-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode is shifted to, but the winning lottery mode falls from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, when a jackpot result is generated based on a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34, it is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result. In other words, if a jackpot result is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34, the player can obtain a value equal to or higher than the hold information related to the hold notification.

  Then, the player expects that a big hit result will be generated in the game times related to winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 34 before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification, It is considered that the launching handle 54 is operated in expectation of winning a game ball to 34.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The hold information stored in the second result display portion holding area Rb corresponding to the lower working port 34 has priority over the hold information stored in the first result display portion holding area Ra corresponding to the upper working port 33. Then, in the configuration in which the success / failure lottery is performed, the hold notification corresponding to the hold information stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra is executed at a timing prior to the hold information being determined as the pass / fail lottery. Sometimes. When such a hold notification is made, the player will receive a winning game ball to the lower operating port 34 so that a winning / no-use lottery is performed on the hold information that is the subject of the hold notification. While expecting to manually operate the firing handle 54 or expecting a winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 34 so that the winning / successful lottery is not performed on the hold information that is the subject of the hold notification. Changes in consciousness may occur depending on the content of the hold notification such as manually operating the firing handle 54. Then, for example, the operation mode of the firing handle 54 may be changed according to the content of the hold notification, such as stopping the operation of the firing handle 54 or slightly reducing or slightly increasing the operation amount of the firing handle 54. . As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which the launch handle 54 is manually operated and a passive game in which the result of the success / failure lottery is confirmed are associated with each other. It becomes possible to increase the degree.

  By performing the hold notification in the special advantageous state, the hold notification is performed in a situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is the high frequency support mode. Thereby, for example, when it is considered that the lottery lottery is not performed on the hold information related to the hold notification stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, the game to the lower operation port 34 is performed. By manually operating the launch handle 54 in such a manner that a winning of a ball is likely to occur, the state in which the hold information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, where the winning lottery is given priority, is continued, It becomes possible not to perform the lottery for the hold information related to the hold notification.

  In the hold display information setting area 265 in the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212, a hold notification permission area 292 and a hold notification disabling area 293 are provided as the first hold display information setting area 291 to display the first result. When new hold information is stored in the department hold area Ra, the hold notification permission area 292 corresponds to the hold display information corresponding to the success / failure result when the success / failure lottery is performed on the hold information. While being set in the unit setting areas 292a to 292d, hold display information for clearly indicating the number of hold information is set in the corresponding unit setting areas 293a to 293d of the hold notification disabled area 293. In addition, when the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is shifted, information is sent to the hold notification permission area 292 and the hold notification disabled area 293 accordingly. The shift process was executed. In the hold notification permission state, the hold display information stored in the hold notification permission area 292 is output to the VDP 255, and in the hold notification disabled state, the hold display information stored in the hold notification disable area 293 is output to the VDP 255. Output to. As a result, when the hold notification disabled state is switched to the hold notification allowable state, the hold information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra can be immediately notified at that timing. Become.

  The main control device 81 displays the variation display time of the patterns of the result display sections AS and BS (that is, in the symbol display device 41) with respect to the hold information subject to the determination of success / failure prior to the hold information that is the subject of the hold notification. When determining the symbol variable display time), the variable display time is determined without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification. In other words, in the process of determining the variable display time (specifically, the process of step S813), the information that will be a big win is included in the hold information that is the target of the lottery after the hold information related to the determination of the variable display time. Do not refer to whether it is included (not determined).

  For example, when the hold information related to the hold notification is information corresponding to the jackpot result of the notification target, the variable display time longer than usual is selected for the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information. With this configuration, there is a concern that in a situation where the hold notification is performed, the time required for digesting each game time becomes long, and the game is prolonged. On the other hand, for example, when the hold information related to the hold notification is information corresponding to the jackpot result of the notification target, the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information is displayed in a shorter display than usual. If the time is selected, there is a concern that the time required to digest each game time will be shortened in the situation where the hold notification is performed, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be extremely high. Is done. On the other hand, since the variable display time is determined without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification as described above, the configuration for performing the hold notification can be improved. .

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the game area in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 24 for illustrating the configuration of the game area in the present embodiment. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

  Similar to the first embodiment, an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the surface of the game board 24 and are partitioned by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. Thus, a game area is formed. In addition, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute a guide rail for a game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53 by the player turning the launch handle 54. Is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail.

  The guide rail is formed so that the exit portion thereof faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of turning operation of the launch handle 54 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is formed by the exit portion from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail is formed. It shifts to the side of the side opposite to the formed side. The exit portion of the guide rail is provided on the left side of the game area.

  In the gaming area, as in the first embodiment, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the variable display unit 36, a pair (two) of operating ports 301, 302 and a pair of through gates 303, 304 are provided. Etc. are provided. However, in this embodiment, the positional relationship between the pair of operating ports 301 and 302 is different from that in the first embodiment, and the positional relationship between the pair of through gates 303 and 304 is also the same as in the first embodiment. Is different. These positional relationships will be described below with reference to the position of the variable display unit 36.

  The variable display unit 36 is arranged on the center side of the game area so that a flow area of the game ball is secured on the top, bottom, left, and right. That is, in the game area, as the flow area of the game ball, the flow area 305 on the upper side of the variable display unit 36, the flow area 306 on the lower side of the variable display unit 36, the flow area 307 on the left side of the variable display unit 36 and the variable display. A flow area 308 on the right side of the unit 36 is provided. The center frame 42 constituting a part of the variable display unit 36 is provided at the lower part of the center frame 42 because the roof unit 309 constituting the part extending from the upper part to the left and right sides extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. Except for the game balls introduced to the stage, the game balls flowing down the game area do not cross or traverse the variable display unit 36.

  The first working port 301 that is one of the pair of working ports 301 and 302 is provided in the lower flow-down region 306 as a first working port device. The first working port 301 corresponds to the upper working port 33 in the first embodiment. Here, each of the flow-down areas 305 to 308 is provided with a dispersion member for dispersing the flow direction of the game ball by the collision with the game ball, and the flow direction of the game ball with the game ball. A guiding member for guiding in a predetermined direction by a collision is provided. The dispersion member includes a nail 38, the guide member includes the roof unit 309, and the decoration member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The dispersion member and the guide member can flow down toward the first operation port 301 regardless of the position of the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53 at the upper part of the game area. It is provided as follows.

  That is, a game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53 and started flowing down on the exit portion side of the guide rail, that is, on the left side of the game area at the upper part of the game area, is the upper flow area 305 → the left flow area 307 → the lower side. The game area flows down on the left path (first path) of the flow area 306. In this case, the dispersion member and the guide member are provided so that a game ball that will flow down the game area in the left path can reach the first operation port 301 depending on the flow mode. Yes. In addition, a game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53 and started to flow on the opposite side of the exit portion of the guide rail in the upper part of the game area, that is, on the right side of the game area, the upper flow area 305 → the right flow area 308 → The game area flows down through the right path (second path) called the lower flow area 306. In this case, the dispersion member and the guide member are provided so that a game ball that will flow down the game area in the right path can reach the first operation port 301 depending on the flow mode. Yes.

  The second working port 302, which is the other of the pair of working ports 301, 302, is provided in the right flow area 308 as a second working port device. The second working port 302 corresponds to the lower working port 34 in the first embodiment. In other words, the second working port 302 is provided with an electric accessory 302a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 302a operates between a closed state and an open state, similar to the electric accessory 34a in the first embodiment. Since the trigger and operation content of the operation are the same as those of the electric accessory 34a in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. In this case, a nail 38 is provided above the second operation port 302, and when the electric accessory 302a is in a closed state, a winning (game ball entry) to the second operation port 302 by the nail 38 is performed. ) Is disabled. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which winning is not difficult and winning is difficult.

  Here, since the second operation port 302 is provided in the right flow area 308 as described above, the second operation port 302 is fired from the game ball launching mechanism 53 and is located on the opposite side of the guide rail outlet portion at the upper part of the game area, that is, on the right side of the game area. The game ball that has started to flow down can flow down toward the second operation port 302, but is emitted from the game ball launching mechanism 53 and at the upper part of the game area, the exit portion side of the guide rail, that is, the left side of the game area The game ball that has started to flow down at is not allowed to flow down toward the second working port 302.

  As described above, the winning to the first operating port 301 can occur regardless of whether the game ball flows on the first path side or the game ball flows on the second path side. The winning to the second operating port 302 can occur only when a game ball flows on the second path side. As a result, for the player, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 54, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the first operating port 301 while preventing the winning of the second operating port 302 from occurring. In addition, it is possible to play a game with the aim of winning the second operating port 302.

  In the pair of through gates 303 and 304, one through gate 303 is provided in the left flowing region 307 and the other through gate 304 is provided in the right flowing region 308. In this case, the through gate 304 provided in the right flow area 308 is provided on the upstream side of the second operation port 302, but is not limited to this, and is downstream of the second operation port 302. It may be provided on the side. A lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 302a is to be opened using a winning in the through gates 303 and 304 as a trigger. Since the specific contents are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  Here, also in this embodiment, in the same way as in the first embodiment, in the lottery determination of each game time, the second operating port is more than the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operating port 301. The hold information acquired based on the winning to 302 is prioritized. In addition, when the gaming state becomes the special advantageous state and the hold notification state becomes the hold notification allowable state, the hold notification may be performed for the hold information stored and held based on the winning to the first operation port 301. In this case, as described above, the player may aim only for winning the first operating port 301 or adjusting the second operating port 302 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 54. Therefore, a game having contents different from those of the first embodiment can be provided to the player.

  Therefore, the state of the game by the player will be described below with reference to the time chart of FIG. In FIG. 45, a case will be described in which the gaming state is a special advantageous state and the hold notification state is a hold notification allowable state.

  In a situation where the state is a special advantageous state and a hold notification permitting state, the player turns the launching handle 54 at the timing t1, and the launch of the game ball toward the game area is started. In this case, the player first adjusts the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 54 to the operation amount in the first range, so that the game ball flows toward the first path side as shown in FIG. Like that. As a result, a winning to the left through gate 303 occurs at the timing t2, etc., so that the electric accessory 302a of the second working port 302 is opened at the timing t3. However, since the launch handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows toward the first path side, a winning to the second operation port 302 does not occur. In addition, a winning to the first working port 301 occurs at the timing of t4 or the like.

  Thereafter, the hold information corresponding to the information of the jackpot result that is the subject of the hold notification is acquired according to the winning to the first operating port 301, and further, the hold notification execution condition is satisfied for the hold information, so that t5 The hold notification is started at the timing. For example, as a hold notification, an image such as “probably common” is displayed in the first hold display area Ga on the display screen of the symbol display device 41.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, the player can play the game times corresponding to the hold information regardless of whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It can be recognized that a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs. In this case, since the current gaming state is the high-frequency support mode in the support mode of the second operating port 302 by the electric accessory 302a, winnings to the second operating port 302 occur relatively frequently, and the game As for the hold information that becomes the start timing of the turn, the hold information related to winning in the second working port 302 is given priority over the holding information related to winning in the first working port 301. Furthermore, since the current lottery mode is the high probability mode in the current gaming state, the game times related to winning in the second operation port 302 will be some jackpot result, specifically a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result. Probability is relatively high.

  Then, at the timing of t6, the player expects that a jackpot result will be generated in the game times related to winning in the second operating port 302 before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification is reached. Then, the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 54 is adjusted to the operation amount in the second range so that the game ball flows toward the second path side as shown in FIG. In this case, in the situation where the launch handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows toward the first path side, a winning to the left through gate 303 has occurred, and the electric accessory 302a has already been opened. Therefore, when the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows toward the second path side, the winning to the second operation port 302 occurs at a relatively early timing such as the timing of t7. As a result, the winning to the second operating port 302 occurs before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification.

  Further, as already described, since the through gate 304 is provided not only on the first path side but also on the second path side, the launch handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows toward the second path side. Even in such a situation, a winning to the through gate 304 may occur. Accordingly, a winning to the right through gate 304 occurs at the timing of t8 or the like, and the electric accessory 302a of the second working port 302 is opened based on the winning. Thereby, the winning to the 2nd operation port 302 may occur also in timings other than the timing of t7.

  By the way, even when a game ball flows toward the second path side, a game ball flows toward the first operation port 301, so that a winning to the first operation port 301 occurs at the timing of t9 or the like. . As a result, even if the firing handle 54 is operated with the aim of generating a prize for the second operating port 302, a prize can be generated for the first operating port 301. Even in a situation where the winning toward the second working port 302 is aimed, a privilege based on the winning at the first working port 301 can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

  The first operating port 301 is provided in the lower flow area 306, whereas the second operating port 302 is provided in the right flow area 308, so that the player can rotate the launch handle 54. By adjusting the amount of dynamic operation, it is possible to play a game aiming for winning in the first operating port 301 while preventing the winning in the second operating port 302, and winning in the second operating port 302 You can play games aiming at. Therefore, for the player, until the hold notification is performed, the firing handle 54 is operated only for winning the first operation port 301 out of the first operation port 301 and the second operation port 302, and the hold notification is performed. After being broken, a game can be performed in which the firing handle 54 is operated with the aim of winning a prize in the second operating port 302. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the relevance between an active game in which the firing handle 54 is manually operated and a passive game in which the result of the success / failure lottery is confirmed.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the second operating port 302 is provided with the electric accessory 302a and the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 302 can occur when the electric accessory 302a is opened, the electric accessory 302a. The first path through which the game ball passes in a situation in which the through gate 303 that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to open the ball is operated with the launch handle 54 aimed at winning the first operating port 301 On the side. As a result, even if the firing handle 54 is operated only for winning the first operating port 301, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 302a is to be opened. It is possible to cause a situation in which the electric accessory 302a is in an open state at the timing when the firing handle 54 is operated aiming at winning the prize 302. Therefore, when the hold notification is made for the hold information related to the winning to the first operating port 301, the winning to the second operating port 302 may be generated before the winning lottery is performed for the hold information. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the through gate 304 is also provided on the second path side through which the game ball passes in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated with the aim of winning a prize to the second operation port 302. Even if the firing handle 54 is being operated with the aim of winning a prize in the mouth 302, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 302a. Therefore, when the hold notification is made for the hold information related to winning in the first operating port 301, the winning in the second operating port 302 may be continued so that the winning lottery is not performed for the hold information. It becomes possible.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the information transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 are different in executing the hold notification. Such a difference is caused by the fact that the processing content of the information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is different from the processing content of the information acquisition processing (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment. Therefore, the information acquisition process in the present embodiment will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing in the present embodiment.

  In the information acquisition process, in steps S2701 to S2704, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S304 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, the confirmation process for holding notification is executed in step S2705, and the operation winning command setting process is executed in step S2706, and then the information acquisition process is terminated.

  Next, the hold notification confirmation process in step S2705 and the operation winning command setting process in step S2706 will be described.

  First, the hold notification confirmation process in step S2705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the confirmation processing for holding notification, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current information acquisition processing is based on winning in the upper working port 33. If it is not based on winning in the upper working port 33, the confirmation process for the on-hold notification is terminated as it is. If it is based on a winning to the upper working port 33, the process proceeds to step S2802.

  In step S2802, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped from the hold information stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra of the RAM 204 in step S2704. In the subsequent step S2803, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time with reference to the first table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area of the ROM 203 is the notification target jackpot result. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to either the common jackpot result set as or the dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change.

  In detail about the first table, as shown in FIG. 48A, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is associated with the first specific result. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning in both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode in the winning or failing lottery executed in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 20), the first identification When the result is set to be a common jackpot result, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is won only in the high probability mode, the first specific result is the jackpot result dedicated to probability change In the case where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value other than the above, the first specific result is set to be a result not to be notified.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the values that are the jackpot result in the low probability mode are set such that the intervals of the plurality of values corresponding to the jackpot result are all the same. In the embodiment, the intervals of a plurality of values corresponding to the jackpot result are set to be different. In other words, when the counter C1 is updated a specific number of times from the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to any one jackpot result value, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the value of another jackpot result is always The value corresponding to the jackpot result is set so that this situation does not occur. The same applies to the value that is a jackpot result in the high probability mode.

  In the subsequent step S2804, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2803 is a common jackpot result. If the result is a common jackpot result, the common jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2805. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2808.

  If it is not a common jackpot result, the process advances to step S2806 to determine whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2803 is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. If it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, this confirmation process is terminated as it is. If it is a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, in step S2807, the jackpot information dedicated to the probability change is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2808.

  In step S2808, the information of the value of the big hit type counter C2 is grasped from the hold information stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra of the RAM 204 in step S2704. In subsequent step S2809, with reference to the second table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area of the ROM 203, the information of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time is the result of the notification target jackpot result. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result set as.

  In detail about the 2nd table, as shown in Drawing 48 (b), the value of jackpot type counter C2 and the 2nd specific result are matched. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value that is a normal jackpot result in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the second specific result is set to be a normal jackpot result, When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value that is a 15R probability variation jackpot result in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the second specific result is set to be a 15R probability variation jackpot result, When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value other than the above, it is set so that the second specific result is a result not to be notified.

  In subsequent step S2810, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2809 is a normal jackpot result. If the result is a normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2811. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  If it is not the normal jackpot result, the process advances to step S2812, and it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2809 is the 15R probability variation jackpot result. If it is not the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the present confirmation process is terminated as it is. If the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the 15R probability variation jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2813. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the confirmation process for hold notification, it is specified whether the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information stored this time corresponds to either the common jackpot result or the jackpot result dedicated to probability change In addition, it is specified whether the information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included in the hold information stored this time corresponds to either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result. As a result, in this pachinko machine 10, as the types of the jackpot results to be notified, the common jackpot result in the case of the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the dedicated jackpot result at the time of the probability change in the case of the normal jackpot result, the 15R probability variation jackpot result, 15R A common jackpot result in the case of the probability variation jackpot result and a jackpot result dedicated to the probability variation in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result can be set. However, in the pachinko machine 10, among the above, four types of notifications are provided: a normal jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a common jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a dedicated jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result. It is set as the type of the target jackpot result.

  Note that if the information specified in the specific process for holding notification can be referred to in the subsequent process, whether or not the specified information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 is arbitrary, for example, stored in the RAM 204. May be.

  Next, the operation winning command setting process in step S2706 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the operation winning command setting process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the current information acquisition process is based on winning in the upper working port 33. If the winning is based on the winning of the upper working port 33, the first setting process in steps S2902 to S2908 is executed. On the other hand, if the winning is based on the winning of the lower working port 34, the second setting process of step S2909 is executed.

  In the first setting process, first, in step S2902, it is determined based on the information on the first specific result and the information on the second specific result stored in the register of the MPU 202 whether or not it is the jackpot result of the notification target. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not either common jackpot information or probability change dedicated jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, the normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is determined. It is determined whether any one is stored. In step S2903, it is determined based on the second specific result information stored in the register of the MPU 202 whether the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether 15R probability variation jackpot information is stored. Also, in step S2904, it is determined based on the information on the first specific result stored in the register of the MPU 202 whether or not it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. Specifically, it is determined whether either normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, is the jackpot information dedicated to probability change stored? Determine whether or not.

  As a result, if the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S2902 to S2904, and the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, a first action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the first action winning command is set. The first operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the first operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a 15R probability variable big hit result. Understand that it is information corresponding to the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a first hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the first operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the first hold increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2902 and step S2903, a negative determination is made in step S2904, and the flow proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, the second action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the second action winning command is set. The second operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the second operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a 15R probability variable big hit result. Understand that the information corresponds to the fact that it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a second hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the second operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the second pending increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If the result is a normal jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, a negative determination is made in step S2903, and the flow proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, a third action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the third action winning command is set. The third operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the third operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a normal jackpot result. Understand that the information corresponds to. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a third hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the third operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the third hold increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  If the result is not to be notified, a negative determination is made in step S2902, and the flow proceeds to step S2908. In step S2908, the fourth action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the fourth action winning command is set. The fourth operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the fourth operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a result not to be notified. To understand that the information corresponds to the situation. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a fourth hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the fourth operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the fourth hold increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

  In the configuration in which the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is included in the operation winning command, a signal line (for electrically connecting the main controller 81 and the sound lamp controller 82) Specifically, the connector unit provided with a common connector at both ends of a plurality of signal lines is illegally removed, and the current value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2 in the main control device 81 are acquired. It is assumed that cheating is done. In addition to such illegal acts, an illegal board is connected to the signal line that electrically connects the main control device 81 and the sound lamp control device 82, and the current jackpot random number counter C1 of the main control device 81 is connected. It is assumed that an illegal act of acquiring the value or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is performed. As described above, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired, it is erroneously assumed that an illegal act or a start prize that causes an illegal start winning at the timing that results in the jackpot winning or the 15R probability variation jackpot result has occurred. There is a concern that fraudulent acts to be detected will cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. On the other hand, instead of transmitting the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as they are, it is configured to transmit the information of the result specified in the main control device 81, so that the occurrence of the fraud Can be prevented.

  The operation winning command transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 has a one-to-one correspondence with the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result and the jackpot type counter C2 which is a 15R probability variable jackpot result. Instead, each operation winning command is set so as to include a value of a jackpot random number counter C1 that is a plurality of types of jackpot results and a value of a jackpot type counter C2 that is a plurality of types of 15R probability variation jackpot results. Therefore, even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired by illegally removing the signal line electrically connecting the main controller 81 and the sound lamp controller 82, the illegally acquired information It is difficult to specify which jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to, and it is difficult to specify which jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to the value. Can be made.

  Further, for the value that is a jackpot result in the low probability mode and the value that is a jackpot result in the high probability mode, the counter C1 is updated a specific number of times from the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to any one of the jackpot result values In this case, a value corresponding to each jackpot result is set so that a situation where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the value of another jackpot result does not always occur. Even with such a configuration, even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired by illegally disconnecting the signal line electrically connecting the main control device 81 and the sound lamp control device 82, the illegal acquisition is performed. It is possible to specify which jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and more specifically to identify which jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to the value. It can be difficult.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration relating to the setting of the hold notification allowable state and the hold notification disabled state is different from that of the first embodiment. The difference is that the processing contents of the third response process and the fourth response process in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82 are different from the third response process and the fourth response process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. It is caused by being. Therefore, the third handling process and the fourth handling process in the present embodiment will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the third handling process in the present embodiment. The third handling process is activated by receiving either a special advantageous start command or a special advantageous end command from the main control device 81, as in the first embodiment.

  In the third response process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not a special advantageous start command is received from the main controller 81. When the special advantageous start command has been received, the allowable start processing in steps S3002 to S3006 is executed, and when the special advantageous start command has not been received, that is, when the special advantageous end command has been received. Executes the processing for allowable termination in steps S3007 to S3009.

  In the allowable start process, first, in step S3002, it is determined whether or not the hold notification allowable state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold notification permission flag (hold notification permission information) is stored in a hold notification permission flag storage area (hold notification permission information storage unit) provided in the other flag storage area 250 in the RAM 244. To do. The hold notification permission flag is a flag that is stored when the hold notification permission state is set in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, and is a flag that is deleted when the hold notification disabled state is set.

  If it is in the hold notification permitting state, an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, and the third corresponding process is terminated as it is. If the hold notification is not permitted, a negative determination is made in step S3002, and the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, a hold notification start lottery process is executed. In the start lottery process for holding notification, first, the counter value for the start lottery is read from the start lottery counter area of the RAM 244. Here, the start lottery counter area is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the command corresponding process (FIG. 33) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the start lottery process, the start lottery table stored in the start lottery table storage area of the ROM 243 is referred to determine whether or not the read out start lottery counter value corresponds to the start win. To do. Although the probability of starting winning is arbitrary, in this pachinko machine 10, the start lottery table is set so that the starting winning is performed with a probability of 1/2.

  In subsequent step S3004, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3003 is a start winning. If it is not the start win, the third corresponding process is terminated as it is. In the case of the start win, the hold notification permission flag is stored in step S3005, and the hold notification start command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3006, and then the third response process ends.

  The display control device 212 receives the hold notification start command from the voice lamp control device 82, thereby executing the same processing as that executed when the special advantageous start command is received in the first embodiment. . That is, the display control device 212 is also in a hold notification allowable state, and is in a state where the hold notification can be performed.

  On the other hand, in the permissible termination process, first, in step S3007, it is determined whether or not the hold notification permissible state is set. If it is not in the hold notification allowable state, the third corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it is in the hold notification permission state, the hold notification permission flag is erased in step S3008, and the hold notification end command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3009, and then the third response processing is ended.

  The display control device 212 receives the hold notification end command from the sound lamp control device 82, thereby executing the same processing as that executed when the special advantageous end command is received in the first embodiment. . That is, the display control device 212 is also in a state where a hold notification is not possible and a state where a hold notification is not performed.

  Next, the fourth response process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the fourth response processing, in steps S3101 to S3110, the same processing as in steps S2301 to S2310 of the fourth response processing (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed, and in step S3112, The same process as step S2311 of the fourth corresponding process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed.

  In this case, in the fourth response process in the present embodiment, the ending command is received from the main control device 81, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S3109, and after setting the ending effect in step S3110, In step S3111, processing for setting to the hold notification disabled state is executed.

  Here, the process for setting the hold notification disabled state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the process for setting the hold notification disabled state, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the hold notification allowable state is set. If it is not in the hold notification allowable state, the setting process is terminated as it is. If it is in the hold notification allowable state, the process proceeds to step S3202.

  In step S3202, a hold notification end lottery process is executed. In the hold lottery process for lottery notification, first, a counter value for end lottery is read from the counter area for end lottery in the RAM 244. Here, the end lottery counter area is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the command corresponding process (FIG. 33) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the end lottery process, the end lottery table stored in the end lottery table storage area of the ROM 243 is referred to determine whether or not the read end lottery counter value corresponds to the end lottery. To do. The probability of winning the end is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the end lottery table is set so that the end winning is achieved with a probability of 1/5.

  In the subsequent step S3203, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3202 is an end winning. If it is not an end win, the setting process is terminated. In the case of end winning, the hold notification flag is deleted in step S3204, and a hold notification end command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3205, and then this setting processing is ended. The processing in the display control device 212 when the hold notification end command is received is as already described.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

  The hold notification start lottery process is executed, and when the winning in the lottery process is set, the hold notification allowable state is set irregularly, and the setting of the hold notification allowable state is irregularly performed. Is achieved. In addition, the hold notification end lottery process is executed, and when the winning in the lottery process is selected, the hold notification disabled state is set, so that the hold notification disabled state is irregularly set. Diversification.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration relating to the setting of the hold notification allowable state and the hold notification disabled state is different from that of the first embodiment. The difference is that the processing contents of the third response process and the fourth response process in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82 are different from the third response process and the fourth response process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. It is caused by being. Therefore, the third handling process and the fourth handling process in the present embodiment will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the fourth response processing in the present embodiment.

  In the fourth response process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a change start command and a type command are received from the main control device 81. When the variation start command and the type command are received, in step S3302, the effect corresponding to the content of the received command among the various effect content tables stored in the effect content table storage area 247 of the ROM 243. With reference to the content table, the production content corresponding to the information of the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation start command is determined, and the production content is set in step S3303. Thereafter, the fourth corresponding process ends.

  If no change start command and type command have been received, it is determined in step S3304 whether a change end command has been received. If a change end command has been received, change end processing is executed in step S3305. In the variation end process, a command is transmitted to the display control device 212 so that the stop result that has already been stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

  In the following step S3306, it is determined whether or not the hold notification permission flag (hold notification permission information) is stored in the hold notification permission flag storage area (hold notification permission information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 250 in the RAM 244. To do. The hold notification permission flag is a flag that is stored when the hold notification permission state is set in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, and is a flag that is deleted when the hold notification disabled state is set.

  If it is in the hold notification permitting state, an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, and the fourth corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the hold notification allowable state, a negative determination is made in step S3306, and the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3307, it is determined whether or not a jackpot result has occurred in the game times related to the processing for ending variation in the immediately preceding step S3305. If the jackpot result has occurred, the fourth corresponding process is terminated as it is. If the big hit result has not occurred, in step S3308, the value of the non-big hit game number counter provided in the RAM 244 is incremented by 1, and the fourth corresponding process is terminated. The non-hit game number counter is a counter for measuring the number of times that a game time that does not result in a big jackpot is continued in a state where the hold notification is not possible, and this count is referred to when setting the hold notification permission state. . This will be described later.

  If the change end command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S3304, and the flow advances to step S3309. In step S3309, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processes, for example, an effect is set corresponding to reception of an opening command or an ending command. In this case, when the ending command is received, not only the production corresponding to the ending command is set, but also the processing for setting to the hold notification disabled state is executed. Such setting processing will be described later. Thereafter, the fourth corresponding process ends.

  Next, the third handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The third handling process is activated by receiving either a special advantageous start command or a special advantageous end command from the main control device 81, as in the first embodiment.

  In the third response process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a special advantageous start command is received from the main controller 81. When the special advantageous start command is received, the allowable start process of steps S3402 to S3406 is executed, and when the special advantageous start command is not received, that is, when the special advantageous end command is received. Performs the process for allowable termination in steps S3407 to S3410.

  In the allowable start process, first, in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the hold notification allowable state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold notification permission flag is stored in the hold notification permission flag storage area of the RAM 244. If it is in the hold notification allowable state, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, and the third corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the hold notification allowable state, a negative determination is made in step S3402, and the process proceeds to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the value of the non-big hit game number counter in the RAM 244 is greater than or equal to the start reference value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the non-big hit game number counter is “100” or more. If it is less than the start reference value, the third corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it is equal to or greater than the start reference value, a hold notification permission flag is stored in step S3404, a hold notification start command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3405, and a non-big hit game number counter is further displayed in step S3406. Is initialized, the third corresponding process is terminated.

  The display control device 212 receives the hold notification start command from the voice lamp control device 82, thereby executing the same processing as that executed when the special advantageous start command is received in the first embodiment. . That is, the display control device 212 is also in a hold notification allowable state, and is in a state where the hold notification can be performed.

  On the other hand, in the permissible termination process, first, in step S3407, it is determined whether or not the hold notification is permitted. If it is not in the hold notification allowable state, the third corresponding process is terminated as it is. If the hold notification permission state is set, the hold notification permission flag is deleted in step S3408, and a hold notification end command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3409. The display control device 212 receives the hold notification end command from the sound lamp control device 82, thereby executing the same processing as that executed when the special advantageous end command is received in the first embodiment. . That is, the display control device 212 is also in a state where a hold notification is not possible and a state where a hold notification is not performed.

  In step S3410, the value of the hold notification continuation counter provided in RAM 244 is initialized. The hold notification continuation counter is a counter for measuring the number of jackpot results that occurred in a situation where the hold notification permission state continues, and the number of such measurements is a hold notification in a situation where a special advantageous end command has not been received. Referenced when setting the disabled state. This will be described later. Thereafter, the third corresponding process is terminated.

  Next, the process for setting to the hold notification disabled state executed in the other setting process in step S3309 of the fourth response process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the process for setting the hold notification disabled state, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the hold notification allowable state is set. If it is not in the hold notification allowable state, the setting process is terminated as it is. If it is in the hold notification allowable state, the process proceeds to step S3502.

  In step S3502, 1 is added to the hold notification continuation counter in the RAM 244. In the subsequent step S3503, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notification continuation counter is equal to or greater than the end reference value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notification continuation counter is “3” or more. If it is less than the end reference value, the setting process is terminated.

  If it is equal to or greater than the end reference value, the hold notification permission flag is deleted in step S3504, and a hold notification end command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3505. As described above, the display control device 212 receives the hold notification end command to enter the hold notification disabled state and does not perform the hold notification. Then, after initializing the hold notification continuation counter in step S3506, the setting processing is terminated.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

  By being configured to be set to the hold notification permissible state based on the situation where the jackpot result does not occur in the hold notification disabled state or the situation where the opening / closing execution mode does not occur continues for a predetermined start reference number of times or more. The hold notification allowable state is set as a remedy for a player who cannot continuously obtain the profit of the jackpot result. As a result, even a player who has continued to play a game that cannot obtain the benefit of the jackpot result will play a game while expecting the occurrence of a hold notification permission state, and the player's attention to the game will be increased. It becomes possible to raise suitably.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration relating to the setting of the hold notification allowable state and the hold notification disabled state is different from that of the first embodiment. Such a difference is caused by the fact that the processing content of the fourth response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82 is different from the fourth response processing (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Therefore, the fourth response process in the present embodiment will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the fourth handling process in the present embodiment.

  In the fourth response process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether a change end command has been received. If the change end command has not been received, after performing other setting processes in step S3613, the fourth corresponding process ends. In other setting processes, for example, when a change start command and a type command are received, the contents of the effect in the game time are determined and the game time is started. In addition, for example, an effect setting corresponding to reception of an opening command or an ending command is performed.

  If a change end command has been received, change end processing is executed in step S3602. In the variation end process, a command is transmitted to the display control device 212 so that the stop result that has already been stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

  In the subsequent step S3603, 1 is added to the game number counter for holding notification provided in the RAM 244. The on-hold notification game count counter is used to measure the number of game times continued in a situation where the hold notification is disabled, and at the same time to measure the number of game times continued in a situation where the hold notification is allowed. It is a counter used in. The number of times of measurement is referred to when setting the hold notification allowable state and is referred to when setting the hold notification disabled state.

  In a succeeding step S3604, it is determined whether or not the hold notification allowable state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold notification permission flag is stored in the hold notification permission flag storage area of the RAM 244. If it is not in the hold notification allowable state, the process for allowing start in steps S3605 to S3608 is executed, and if it is in the hold notification allowable state, the process for allowing end in steps S3609 to S3612 is executed.

  In the allowable start process, first, in step S3605, it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter for holding notification is equal to or greater than a start reference value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the game notification counter for holding notification is “100” or more. If it is less than the start reference value, the fourth corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it is equal to or greater than the start reference value, a hold notification permission flag is stored in step S3606, a hold notification start command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3607, and a hold notification game is further played in step S3608. After the count counter is initialized, the fourth corresponding process is terminated.

  The display control device 212 receives the hold notification start command from the voice lamp control device 82, thereby executing the same processing as that executed when the special advantageous start command is received in the first embodiment. . That is, the display control device 212 is in a hold notification allowable state, and is in a state where the hold notification can be performed.

  On the other hand, in the permissible end process, first, in step S3609, it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter for holding notification is equal to or greater than the end reference value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the game notification counter for holding notification is “100” or more. If it is less than the end reference value, the fourth corresponding process is ended as it is. If it is equal to or greater than the end reference value, the hold notification permission flag is deleted in step S3610, a hold notification end command is transmitted to the display control device 212 in step S3611, and a hold notification game is played in step S3612. After the count counter is initialized, the fourth corresponding process is terminated.

  The display control device 212 receives the hold notification end command from the sound lamp control device 82, thereby executing the same processing as that executed when the special advantageous end command is received in the first embodiment. . That is, the display control device 212 is also in a state where a hold notification is not possible and a state where a hold notification is not performed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

  By adopting a configuration in which the hold notification permission state is periodically set every time a predetermined number of games elapses after the hold notification disabled state, the hold notification permission state is periodically set. It is possible to suitably maintain the degree of attention to.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot winning in the winning lottery in the situation where the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, is a jackpot winning in the winning lottery in the situation in the high probability mode. Although it is configured to be included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1, in the present embodiment, the two values do not overlap.

  The contents of the success / failure table of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 57B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table for the high probability mode.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the situation where the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a big winner in the success / failure lottery is “7” and “307”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot winning in the winning lottery in the situation where the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is “36”, “67”, “100”, “131”, “164”, “195”, “223”, “241”, “272”, “335”, “362”, “395”, “423”, “468”, “493”, “525” ”,“ 557 ”,“ 572 ”, and“ 598 ”. In this case, when the two are compared, all of the value groups of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the winning lottery in the situation in the low probability mode are all jackpot random number counters that win the jackpot in the situation in the high probability mode. It is not included in the value group of C1.

  Corresponding to the fact that the contents of the success / failure table are different from those of the first embodiment as described above, the mode of hold notification is also different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the difference in the mode of the hold notification will be described below.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold notification table in the present embodiment. FIG. 58 (a) shows the first table and FIG. 58 (b) shows the second table.

  All of the value groups of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation in the low probability mode are included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the prize in the lottery in the situation of the high probability mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the common jackpot result is not set as the notification target jackpot result, but instead the normal-time special jackpot result (low-probability dedicated jackpot result) is set. Has been. That is, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning only in the low probability mode in the winning or failing lottery in the main control device 81, the first specific result is set so as to be a special bonus jackpot result. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning only in the high probability mode in the winning / losing lottery in the main controller 81, the first specific result is set to be a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change. Has been. Note that the second table is the same as that of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG.

  Next, the hold notification specific process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold notification specific process, first, in step S3701, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the current operation winning command is grasped. In the subsequent step S3702, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 ascertained this time with reference to the first table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 is the notification target jackpot. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to either the normal-time dedicated jackpot result or the probability-change dedicated jackpot result set as a result.

  In the subsequent step S3703, it is specified whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S3702 is a normal special jackpot result. If it is a normal special jackpot result, in step S3704, the normal time special jackpot information (low probability special jackpot information) is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  If it is not the normal special jackpot result, the process advances to step S3705 to determine whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S3702 is the probability change special jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, this specific process is terminated as it is. If it is a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, in step S3706, the jackpot information dedicated to the probability change is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  Since each process of step S3707 to step S3712 is the same as each process of step S2107 to step S2112 in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  By executing the hold notification specific process as described above, in the first corresponding process (FIG. 34) in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, the information stored in the register of the MPU 242 as a result of the specific process. Is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and is information corresponding to the normal special jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004 and step S2005, and a negative determination is made in step S2006. move on. In step S2008, the second hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212.

  In the hold display information setting process (FIG. 41) at the time of winning of the display control device 212, the process from step S2507 to step S2510 is executed by receiving the second hold increase command.

  Specifically, individual notification lottery processing is executed in step S2507. In a succeeding step S2508, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2507 is an individual notification winning. If it is not the individual notification winning, the first notification information is set in step S2509 for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. The contents of the hold notification image when the first notification information is set are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the case of individual notification winning, in step S2510, third notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. . The third notification information is output to the VDP 255 in the internal command output process (FIG. 42), so that the normal-time dedicated image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the correspondence of the first hold display area Ga. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 to be displayed, a “communication only” image, which is information indicating that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a normal special jackpot result, is displayed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained in addition to or in place of the effects in the first embodiment.

  In the special advantageous state, as the hold information related to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33, the hold information that is a big hit win only in the low probability mode is stored, and a hold notification to that effect is further provided for the hold information. When it is executed, the player recognizes that the jackpot winning will not occur unless the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode until the holding information related to the holding notification becomes the target of the winning lottery. Then, the player expects that a normal jackpot result will be generated by the hold information related to the winning to the lower operation port 34 until the hold information related to the hold notification becomes the target of the lottery determination, and the launch handle 54 Will be operated. Furthermore, the player will normally receive a jackpot result after as many probabilistic jackpot results have been generated by the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 until the hold information related to the hold notification becomes the target of the lottery. The firing handle 54 is operated while expecting that the above will occur.

  On the other hand, in the special advantageous state, as the hold information related to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33, the hold information that is a big hit in the high probability mode is stored, and further hold notification is executed for the hold information If the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode before the hold information related to the hold notification becomes the target of the winning / failing lottery, the big hit winning will not occur. Then, the player stops the operation of the launch handle 54 so that no further winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 34 is generated so that the hold information related to the hold notification is the target of the lottery decision. It becomes.

  Even in the above configuration, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which the launch handle 54 is manually operated and a passive game in which the result of the success / failure lottery is confirmed are related to each other. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, a configuration in which the hold notification is performed not only on the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 but also on hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 will be described below. In the following description, differences from the third embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process for holding notification related to the lower operation port, which is executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. The confirmation process is executed as a part of step S2705 in the information acquisition process (FIG. 46). In the process of step S2705, in addition to the confirmation process of FIG. 60, the confirmation process of FIG. 47 in the third embodiment is also executed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the current information acquisition process is based on winning in the lower operation port 34. If it is not based on winning in the lower operating port 34, the confirmation process for the on-hold notification is terminated as it is. If it is based on a winning to the lower working port 34, the process proceeds to step S3802.

  In step S3802, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped from the hold information stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb of the RAM 204 in step S2704. In the subsequent step S3803, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time with reference to the first table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area of the ROM 203 is the notification target jackpot result. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to either the common jackpot result set as or the dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change. The contents of the first table are the same as those of the first table (see FIG. 48A) referred to in the confirmation process for holding notification regarding the holding information relating to winning in the upper working port 33, and therefore will be described. Is omitted.

  In the subsequent step S3804, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S3803 is a common jackpot result. If it is a common jackpot result, the common jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S3805. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3808.

  If it is not a common jackpot result, the process advances to step S3806 to determine whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S3803 is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. If it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, this confirmation process is terminated as it is. If it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change, the jackpot information dedicated to probability change is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S3807. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3808.

  In step S3808, the information of the value of the big hit type counter C2 is grasped among the hold information stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb of the RAM 204 in step S2704. In subsequent step S3809, with reference to the second table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area of the ROM 203, the information of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time is the result of the notification target jackpot result. It is specified whether it corresponds to the normal jackpot result or 15R probability variation jackpot result set as.

  In the second table, only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result are set as the types of second specific results to be distributed, and the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 is a normal jackpot result of “0-9”. And the 15R probability variation jackpot result is “10-29”.

  In subsequent step S3810, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S3809 is a normal jackpot result. If the result is a normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S3811. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished. If it is not the normal jackpot result, the 15R probability variable jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S3812. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  Note that if the information specified in the specific process for holding notification can be referred to in the subsequent process, whether or not the specified information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 is arbitrary, for example, stored in the RAM 204. May be.

  Next, the operation winning command setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the operation winning command setting process, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the current information acquisition process is based on winning in the lower operation port 34. If not based on winning in the lower operating port 34, the first setting process is executed in step S3902, and then the setting process of the operation winning command is terminated. Since the content of the first setting process is the same as that in steps S2902 to S2908 in the third embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is based on a winning to the lower working port 34, in step S3903, based on the information of the first specific result stored in the register of the MPU 202, whether or not it is a jackpot result of the notification target. judge. In step S3904, it is determined whether or not the result is the 15R probability variation jackpot result based on the information on the second specific result stored in the register of the MPU 202. In step S3905, it is determined based on the information on the first specific result stored in the register of the MPU 202 whether or not it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change.

  As a result, if it is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability variation dedicated jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S3906, and the lower first operation prize is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. A command is selected, and the lower first operation winning command is set. The lower first operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result but not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, the process advances to step S3907 to select a lower second action winning command from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. Select and set the lower second action winning command. The lower second operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If it is a normal jackpot result, the process advances to step S3908 to select a lower third action winning command from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the lower third action. Set the winning command. The lower third operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If the result is not a notification target, the process advances to step S3909 to select a lower fourth operation winning command from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. Set an operational winning command. The lower fourth operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The various operation winning commands set in this setting process are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82, and the sound lamp control device 82 transmits the received operation winning command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. To do.

  Next, the hold notification control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described. Here, the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 includes a first hold display information setting area 291 and a second hold display information setting area 294, as in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, both the first hold display information setting area 291 and the second hold display information setting area 294 are provided with a hold notification allowing area and a hold notification disabling area. In the hold notification control process, predetermined hold display information is set for each of these areas.

  In the hold notification control process, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is an operation winning command, and is an operation winning command. In step S4002 to step S4010, the on-hold increase time setting process is executed.

  In the holding increase setting process, first, in step S4002, it is determined whether or not the operation winning command received this time includes information corresponding to winning in the lower operation port 34. If the information corresponding to the winning to the lower working port 34 is included, the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, the display-side second reserved storage number IbN2 stored in the hold counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is incremented by one. In a succeeding step S4004, a hold display information setting process for disabling notification is executed. Specifically, among the first unit setting area to the fourth unit setting area in the hold notification disabling area of the second hold display information setting area 294, the display-side second hold memory number incremented by 1 in step S4003. The normal hold display information is set for the unit setting area corresponding to IbN2.

  In subsequent step S4005, a notification generation lottery process is executed. Since the processing contents of the notification generation lottery process are the same as those in step S2405 in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  In subsequent step S4006, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S4005 is a notification generation winning. If it is a notification generation winning, a hold display information setting process at the time of winning is executed in step S4007, and if it is not a notification generation winning, a hold display information setting process at the time of losing is executed in step S4008. In these setting processes, except that the setting target of the hold display information is not the first hold display information setting area 291 but the second hold display information setting area 294, step S2407 and step in the first embodiment are performed. Since this is the same as the processing of S2408, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if the operation winning command received this time does not include information corresponding to winning in the lower operating port 34, a negative determination is made in step S4002, and the flow proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 stored in the reserved counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is incremented by one. In a succeeding step S4010, a hold display information setting process for the upper working port is executed. Since this processing is the same as steps S2404 to S2408 in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  If the command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is not an operation winning command, a negative determination is made in step S4001 and the process proceeds to step S4011. In step S4011, it is determined whether the command to be read this time is a pending decrease command. If it is a hold reduction command, the processing of steps S4012 to S4016 is executed. Since these processes are the same as steps S2412 to S2416 in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is a command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is not a pending decrease command, a negative determination is made in step S4011, the process proceeds to step S4017, and the processes in steps S4017 to S4020 are performed. Run. Since these processes are the same as steps S2417 to S2420 in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, internal command output processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the output process of the internal command, the hold notification permission area 292 of the first hold display information setting area 291 in the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 and the hold notification disabled of the first hold display information setting area 291 are disabled. From among the area 293, the hold notification permission area of the second hold display information setting area 294, and the hold notification disabling area of the second hold display information setting area 294, the area that is the output target of the internal command is specified. Then, a process for outputting an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set in the first to fourth unit setting areas of the specified area to the VDP 255 is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a hold notification permission flag is stored in the work RAM 254. When the hold notification permission flag is stored, in step S4102, an internal command including the content of each hold display information set in the hold notification permission area 292 in the first hold display information setting area 291 is set to VDP 255. Output to. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 272 to 275 in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 1st reservation display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, while notifying in order to specify the number of reservation information stored in reservation area Ra for the 1st result display part of main controller 81, it performs. A hold notification corresponding to the contents of the hold information is performed.

  In a succeeding step S4103, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set in the hold notification permission area in the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 282 to 285 in the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. As a result, in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41, a notification for clearly indicating the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 81 is performed. A hold notification corresponding to the contents of the hold information is performed. Thereafter, the output process of this internal command is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hold notification permission flag is not stored, the internal information including the contents of each hold display information set in the hold notification disabling area 293 in the first hold display information setting area 291 in step S4104. The command is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 272 to 275 in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 1st reservation display area Ga of the symbol display apparatus 41, the alert | report for specifying the number of the hold information stored in the 1st result display part reservation area Ra of the main control apparatus 81 is performed. However, the hold notification according to the contents of the hold information is not performed.

  In a succeeding step S4105, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set in the hold notification disabled area in the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 282 to 285 in the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 2nd reservation display area Gb of the symbol display apparatus 41, the alert | report for specifying the number of the hold information stored in the 2nd result display part reservation area Rb of the main controller 81 is performed. However, the hold notification according to the contents of the hold information is not performed. Thereafter, the output process of this internal command is terminated.

  Next, the effect | action by the holding | reporting alert | report in this Embodiment is demonstrated, referring the time chart of FIG. In FIG. 64, the range of A shows a case where the hold notification about the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 34 is not performed, and the range of B in FIG. 64 shows the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 34. A case where a hold notification is performed is shown.

  First, the range of A will be described.

  The support mode of the electric accessory 34a at the lower operating port 34 is the high frequency support mode and the variable winning device 32 is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and four pieces of hold information related to winning at the lower operating port 34 are stored. In this situation, the game times start timing comes at the timing t1. In this case, the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 becomes a game turn start target, and the variable display is started in the second result display section BS. Thereafter, every time the game times start timing is reached, the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 becomes the game times start target, and the variable display is started on the second result display section BS. Note that the player has stopped the operation of launching the game ball after the timing t1, and no new on-hold storage of the on-hold information related to winning in the lower operation port 34 has occurred.

  Thereafter, a 15R probability change big hit result is generated at the game times started at the timing t2, which is the timing at which all the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is consumed, and the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t3. The In this case, in the electric power support process (FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, even if the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode before the start of the open / close execution mode, Processing for setting the support mode to be the low frequency support mode (specifically, determination processing in steps S1707 and S1809) is executed. Therefore, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing t3 when the open / close execution mode is started.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is terminated at the timing of t4. In this case, since the current open / close execution mode is executed based on the result of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode at the timing t4.

  In addition, at the timing of t3, the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 34 is not stored, and the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low-frequency support mode as described above in the opening / closing execution mode. Due to the fact that no winning is made to the lower working port 34, the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 34 is not stored on hold at the timing of t4. On the other hand, during the opening / closing execution mode, a winning is made to the upper working port 33, and the hold information relating to the winning to the upper working port 33 is stored on hold. Therefore, immediately after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 becomes a target for starting game times, and the variable display is started in the first result display section AS.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is opened, and a winning to the lower working port 34 occurs.

  That is, in the range of A, the hold information related to winning at the lower operating port 34 is not stored before the opening / closing execution mode, and further, no winning at the lower operating port 34 occurs during the opening / closing execution mode. After the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 becomes a target for starting the game times even though the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

  Next, the range of B will be described.

  In a situation that is in the high frequency support mode and not in the opening / closing execution mode, and in which three pieces of hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 are stored, winning in the lower operating port 34 occurs at timing t6. Then, there are four pieces of hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34. In addition, at the timing of t6, the hold notification having the content indicating that the hold information acquired based on the current winning prize corresponds to the big win is started in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41. .

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 becomes the target of the game round, and the variable display is started on the second result display section BS. In addition, at a timing such as t8, in the situation where the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, a prize is awarded to the lower working port 34, and the hold information relating to the winning to the lower working port 34 is newly held and stored. ing.

  Thereafter, a 15R probability change jackpot result is generated at the game times started at the timing of t9, and the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t10. In this case, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Further, three pieces of hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 are stored in a hold.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t11. In this case, since the current opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode.

  Further, at the timing of t10, the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is stored, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is more than the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33. Priority is digested. Therefore, even if the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 is stored, the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 immediately after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the target of the game round. Variation display is started in the result display section BS.

  Thereafter, the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is opened at the timing of t12, and a prize is generated for the lower working port 34. At the timing of t13, the hold information relating to the winning for the lower working port 34 is played. As a start target, the variable display of the second result display unit BS is started.

  That is, in the range of B, the hold information related to winning in the lower operation port 34 is stored before the opening / closing execution mode, and the hold information related to winning in the lower operation port 34 is stored in the game after the opening / closing execution mode ends. To be started.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the open / close execution mode, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of whether the support mode is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. In this case, the occurrence of a large number of winnings in the lower operation port 34 in the opening / closing execution mode is suppressed, and accordingly, for example, the ball exit rate in the opening / closing execution mode varies according to the winning frequency in the lower operation port 34. It can be suppressed.

  However, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 becomes the target for starting the game times than the case where the holding information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 becomes the target for starting the game times. In the configuration in which the game result is more advantageous for the player and the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode in the opening / closing execution mode, a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 34 during the opening / closing execution mode. If the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is not stored at the timing before the opening / closing execution mode occurs, immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends, as shown in the range of A in FIG. In this case, there is a high possibility that the hold information relating to winning in the upper working port 33 becomes a target for starting game times.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information acquired based on the winning at the upper operating port 33 is the game information whose holding information acquired based on the winning at the lower operating port 34 is the start target of the game round. It is more advantageous for the player than it is to be started. Then, for the player, it is preferable that immediately after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, not the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 but the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 becomes the start target of the game times. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the player who has confirmed the hold notification by performing the hold notification on the hold information related to the winning to the lower operating port 34 is shown in FIG. As shown in the range of B, based on the hold information related to the hold notification, an attempt is made to store as much hold information related to winning to the lower working port 34 before the opening / closing execution mode is started. it is conceivable that. In other words, according to this configuration, an active game in which the launch handle 54 is operated so that a winning to the lower working port 34 occurs and a passive game in which the result of the lottery check is correlated with each other. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel game and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the second operating port 311 that is prioritized in the lottery for each game round is different from that of the second embodiment, and a prize is awarded to the second operating port 311. The handling in the case where the hold information acquired on the basis of the game information is the start target of the game times is different from that of the second embodiment. Such a different configuration will be described below. In the following description, differences from the second embodiment will be described, and description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a front view of game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  Similar to the second embodiment, an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the surface of the game board 24 and are partitioned by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. Thus, a game area is formed. In the gaming area, as in the first embodiment, a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a variable display unit 36, a pair of operating ports 301, 311 and the like are provided. The position in the region is the same as that in the second embodiment.

  However, in this embodiment, the second working port 311 is not provided with an electric accessory, and further, the through gate is not provided in correspondence with the absence of the electric accessory. That is, in the present embodiment, the ease of winning a prize does not depend on the gaming state for both the first operating port 301 and the second operating port 311. Therefore, in any game state, the game ball is fired so as to flow down the game area in the left path (first path) of the upper flow area 305 → the left flow area 307 → the lower flow area 306. In this case, only the first working port 301 out of the first working port 301 and the second working port 311 can win a prize, and the right path (upper flow region 305 → right flow region 308 → lower flow region 306) When the game ball is fired so as to flow down the game area in the second route), it is possible to win both the first operation port 301 and the second operation port 311.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the second operating port 311 is not provided with the electric accessory, the winning lottery of each game time is based on the winning to the first operating port 301 as in the second embodiment. The hold information acquired based on the winning to the second operating port 311 is prioritized over the acquired hold information. In addition, even if the gaming state is any gaming state, the holding notification is performed on the holding information stored on the basis of winning to the first operating port 301 by setting the holding notification state to the holding notification allowable state. May be.

  Here, in the said 2nd Embodiment, it becomes a big win by the holding information acquired based on the winning information to the 1st operation port 301, and the holding information acquired based on the winning to the 2nd operation port 311. The allocation table storage area 222 stored in the ROM 203 of the main controller 81 is set so that the allocation destination and allocation ratio of the jackpot result are different in this case. The allocation table storage area 222 is set so that the allocation destination and allocation ratio of the jackpot result in the case of becoming the same are the same.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 66, a common distribution table (common distribution information group) is stored in the distribution table storage area 222, and in the distribution table, a normal jackpot as a distribution destination of the jackpot result The result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set, and the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 for each jackpot result is that the normal jackpot result is set to "0-9" and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is "10 to 10". 29 ".

  Furthermore, the number of award balls is set to be the same (for example, 3) when a winning is made to the first working port 301 and when a winning is made to the second working port 311. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the ease of winning a prize does not depend on the gaming state for both the first operating port 301 and the second operating port 311, but also the first operating port It is set so that the benefits obtained by the player are the same when a winning to 301 occurs and when a winning to the second operating port 311 occurs. In addition, with respect to such a privilege, it is recognized that the player can obtain the same level of benefit when a winning at the first operating port 301 occurs and when a winning at the second operating port 311 occurs. What is necessary is just and it is not necessary to limit to the structure where the provision aspect of a privilege is completely the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation selected at each game time between the holding information acquired based on the winning at the first operating port 301 and the holding information acquired based on the winning at the second operating port 311. The display time is configured to vary. The difference is that the processing configuration of the variable display time setting process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and the contents of the variable display time table storage area 223 stored in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81 are different. It is caused by. The difference will be described below.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time in the present embodiment. The change display time setting process is executed in step S813 of the change start process (FIG. 20) in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 as in the first embodiment.

  In the change display time setting process, first, in step S4201, the value of the change type counter CS stored in the change type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 202.

  In subsequent step S4202, it is determined whether or not the start target of the current game round is the hold information acquired based on winning in the first operation port 301. If the hold information is acquired based on a winning to the first working port 301, the process proceeds to step S4203.

  In step S4203, a non-priority side table reference process is executed. Specifically, referring to the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, refer to a non-priority side table that is a variable display time table corresponding to the first operation port 301 and corresponding to the presence / absence of reach display. The variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired. In subsequent step S4204, the variable display time information acquired in step S4203 is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the second working port 311, the process proceeds to step S 4205. In step S4205, a priority table reference process is executed. Specifically, referring to the table corresponding to the presence / absence of reach display, etc., from the variable display time table storage area 223, the priority side table which is the variable display time table corresponding to the second working port 311 is referred to. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In subsequent step S4206, the variable display time information acquired in step S4205 is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, the difference between the non-priority side table and the priority side table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68A is a non-priority side reach non-occurrence table that is referred to in the game times where no reach occurs in the non-priority side table, and the hold information acquired based on winning in the first operating port 311 is 2. 68 (b) is a table for priority side non-occurrence generation that is referred to in the game times in which no reach occurs in the priority side table and is used for winning the second operating port 311. The table referred when the holding information acquired based on two is shown is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a) and FIG. 68 (b), the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is divided into four ranges in both the priority side table and the non-priority side table. Are “0-49”, “50-99”, “100-149” and “150-198”. However, the variable display time set for each range is different between the non-priority side table and the priority side table. More specifically, the non-priority side table has 10 sec, 15 sec, 20 sec, and 25 sec as shown in FIG. 68 (a), whereas the priority table has the non-priority side table as shown in FIG. 68 (b). 15 sec, 20 sec, 25 sec, 30 sec. That is, it is easier to select the variable display time for the priority side table than for the non-priority side table. This is set to be the same even when the other non-priority side table is compared with the priority side table under the condition that the occurrence of reach and the number of holds are the same. As a result, the game times related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second operating port 311 that is prioritized in the winning / losing lottery are acquired based on the winning to the first operating port 301 that is not prioritized in the winning / losing lottery. The time required for digestion is longer than the game times related to the hold information.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the second embodiment.

  The second operating port 311 is not equipped with an electric accessory, and both the first operating port 301 and the second operating port 311 do not vary in ease of winning depending on the gaming state. Is formed. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of modes with different easiness to win the second operating port 311 are set, the firing handle 54 is manually operated unless a mode in which winning is likely to occur in the second operating port 311 is not achieved. Therefore, it is impossible to provide a novel game in which the active game and the passive game of confirming the result of the lottery are mutually related. In this case, if the frequency at which the winning to the second operation port 311 is likely to occur is reduced, the opportunity to provide the novel game is reduced accordingly. Further, in a configuration in which a mode in which a winning to the second operation port 311 is likely to occur is won by a predetermined lottery, the above novel game is provided to a player who is not won in the lottery. I can't. On the other hand, since both the first operation port 301 and the second operation port 311 are formed so that the ease of winning does not vary depending on the game state, the novel game is described above. It can be provided to the player without causing such restrictions.

  Moreover, when the hold information memorize | stored in the holding area Ra for 1st result display parts becomes a big win, and when the hold information memorize | stored in the hold area Rb for 2nd result display parts becomes a big win In the case where the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit becomes the start target of the game times by making the type of the jackpot result to be distributed and the distribution ratio thereof the same. The advantage for the player in the game is the same as the advantage for the player when the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section is the start of the game round. . Thereby, it is advantageous for the player in a configuration in which both the ease of winning a prize to the first operating port 301 and the ease of winning a prize to the second operating port 311 do not vary depending on the gaming state. When the launch operation is performed aiming at winning of one of the operating ports, the performance is suppressed from becoming extremely high compared to the case where the launch operation is performed aiming at the other. Thereby, the said effect can be show | played, suppressing generation | occurrence | production of this inconvenience.

  In addition, the player who has confirmed the content of the hold notification related to the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit does not want to set the hold information related to the hold notification as the start target of the game round. In this case, it is assumed that it is desired to generate a prize for the second operating port 311 and to continue the situation in which the hold information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. In this case, when the hold information stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is a game turn start target, the hold information stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra. Since it is configured so that a variable display time longer than the case in which the game is to be started is selected, during the game play related to the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit A new winning to the second working port 311 is likely to occur, and accordingly, the situation in which the hold information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is easily continued.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

  (1) The information transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 is limited to only information for determining whether or not the jackpot is won or information for specifying the distribution destination of the jackpot result. There may be a configuration that includes information on whether or not reach has occurred. In this case, as the hold notification, not only the contents of the jackpot result but also the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the expectation level of reach occurrence, and the like may be displayed.

  In addition, among the above embodiments, except for the eighth embodiment, the hold notification is made only for the hold information related to the winning of the upper operation port 33. In addition, the lower operation port 34 is provided. It is good also as a structure which carries out hold alert | reporting also about the hold information which concerns on a prize. In this case, when the hold information relating to the winning of the lower operating port 34 is newly stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 of the hold information and the jackpot type counter C2 The operation winning command may be transmitted including the above information, or the operation winning command may be transmitted including the information of the result specified in the main controller 81 as in the third embodiment.

  (2) Although the advantage for the player to enter the hold notification permission state is reduced as compared with the configuration of the first embodiment or the like, the hold notification is performed in any gaming state. It is good also as a structure which can be hold | maintained, and it is good also as a structure which can carry out holding | reporting only in a normal gaming state. In this case, even in a configuration in which the hold notification can be performed in the normal gaming state, in the main control device 81 about the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information that is the target of the hold notification. When determining the variable display time of the pattern of each result display part AS and BS, it is preferable that the variable display time is determined without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification.

  For example, when the hold information related to the hold notification is information corresponding to the jackpot result of the notification target, the variable information that is longer than usual is displayed for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination prior to the hold information related to the hold notification. If the time is selected or the variable display time shorter than normal is selected, the time required to digest each game time becomes longer or shorter in the situation where the hold notification is performed. Then, according to the adjustment method of the angle and direction of the nail provided in the game area, a game hall in which the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 is relatively likely to occur, There may be a difference in the digestion rate of game times per unit time with a game hall in which winning of game balls is relatively difficult to occur. That is, in the former game hall, there are many occasions where the hold information that is the target of the hold notification as described above is stored in a situation where a plurality of hold information is already stored, while in the latter game hall, the opportunity is Few. In this case, if a variable display time longer than normal is selected, the digestion rate of game times per unit time in the former game hole is lower than that of the latter game hole, and a variable display time shorter than normal is selected. If this is the case, the rate of game times per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than that in the latter game hall. On the other hand, it is possible to hold without affecting the digestion rate of game times per unit time by determining the variable display time without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification. The effect by performing notification can be obtained.

  (3) In the first embodiment or the like, as a pending notification, it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change, a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a jackpot result only for the probability change, 15R probability variation Although it is set as the structure which alert | reports that it is a jackpot result and a normal jackpot result, it is not limited to this, It is good also as a structure which alert | reports that it is another jackpot result. For example, it is a normal jackpot result that is not a dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change, a normal jackpot result that is a jackpot result at the time of the probability change, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, etc. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, even if the hold notification permissible state is set, the hold notification is not performed unless winning is made in the notification generation lottery process. It is good also as a structure by which hold notification is performed about the hold information of. In this case, the advantage for the player of being set in the hold notification allowable state is higher than that in the above embodiments. Further, all of the jackpot results that may be generated in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 may be set as the hold notification target. In this case, the amount of information that the player can obtain from the hold notification can be increased, and the advantage for the player in the hold notification allowed state is enhanced as compared to the above embodiment.

  (5) In the first embodiment or the like, when the hold notification is executed, the hold information related to the hold notification is the hold information that is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability change dedicated jackpot result. In the individual notification lottery process in step S2502, a hold notification image indicating that the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result that is a dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability variation is displayed. Instead, the individual notification lottery process is not executed, and when the hold information related to the hold notification is the hold information that is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the special jackpot result at the time of probability change, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is It may be configured to display a hold notification image indicating that it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change.

  (6) In the first embodiment or the like, when the hold notification is executed, the hold information related to the hold notification is a hold information that is a 15R probability variable jackpot result and is not a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. When the individual notification lottery process in step S2507 is performed, the hold notification image indicating that the result is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and not the probability variation special jackpot result is displayed. Thus, when the individual notification lottery process is not executed and the hold information related to the hold notification is hold information that is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and is not a dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change, the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. It is good also as a structure by which the image | video of the pending | holding notification which shows that it is not a time exclusive jackpot result is displayed.

  In addition, you may apply this structure with respect to the structure regarding the pending | holding alerting | reporting of the normal special jackpot result in the said 7th Embodiment.

  (7) In the configuration in which the individual notification lottery process in step S2502 is executed as in the first embodiment, the hold notification image when the individual notification is not won in the lottery process is The information may be information indicating that it is a 15R probability change jackpot result, and may be information indicating that the information may correspond to the jackpot result dedicated to probability change. Specifically, an image such as “Could?” May be displayed as a hold notification. In this case, the hold notification image in the case where the individual notification lottery processing in step S2507 is not performed for individual notification corresponds to the jackpot result dedicated to probability change with a predetermined probability (for example, one-to-one). It is good also as a structure by which the information which shows that there is possibility or the information which is not a jackpot result only at the time of probability change is displayed as a pending | holding alert | report. Specifically, either a “probable” or “probable” image may be displayed as a hold notification with a predetermined probability.

  (8) The display content of the hold notification image is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, specific instruction information such as “stop operation of the firing handle 54” or “continue operation of the firing handle 54” may be displayed.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the hold notification is performed while clearly indicating the order of the lottery of the hold information related to the hold notification. For example, by displaying a predetermined notification image (for example, a notification character, a notification reach effect or a notification background) together with a variable display image of a symbol in a game round at a timing prior to the hold information related to the hold notification, It is good also as a structure which performs a pending | holding alert | report. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs a predetermined sound and an audio | voice from the speaker part 64 instead of a predetermined alerting | reporting image.

  Here, in each of the above-described embodiments, an operation winning command is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 at a timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and a hold notification corresponding to the operation winning command is received. Is configured. Therefore, when a game ball is won in the upper working port 33 in a situation where the symbol variation display is performed at a predetermined game time on the symbol display device 41, the operation winning command is controlled by the main control during the symbol variation display. Sent from the device 81. In this case, when the predetermined notification image is displayed as the hold notification as described above, the predetermined notification image may be displayed during the change display of the symbol.

  (9) The predetermined notification means for performing the hold notification is not limited to the first hold display area Ga in the symbol display device 41, and may be configured to perform the hold notification in a dedicated display device. Instead of a display device having a display screen, a configuration may be adopted in which the hold notification is performed by a light emitting unit, a movable decorative member, a speaker unit, or the like.

  (10) The type of the jackpot result by the winning lottery and the distribution lottery relating to the upper operating port 33 and the type of the jackpot result by the lottery lottery and the sorting lottery relating to the lower operating port 34 may be completely the same, It is good also as a completely different structure. Further, as a jackpot result, a jackpot result that causes a transition to the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode without generating the opening / closing execution mode may be set. In addition, a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the normal gaming state may be set, and a success / failure result that may result in the above disadvantageous gaming state may be set as a success / failure result based on the success / failure lottery.

  (11) The number of reservations is not limited to the configuration in which the number of the first result display area reservation areas Ra is four and the number of the second result display area reservation areas Rb is four. Five or more may be sufficient, and it is good also as a structure from which both holding numbers differ.

  (12) The method of measuring each time in each of the above embodiments is arbitrary, and the method of counting a predetermined value using the counter area may be an addition formula or a subtraction formula. Further, the method of monitoring a power failure in the main controller 81 or the like is also arbitrary. The number of rounds in each opening / closing execution mode is also arbitrary.

  In addition, the configuration of the game ball for the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly. In the configuration having a function of storing the virtual game medium, It is good also as a structure which provides the said virtual game medium.

  Also, the symbol display device 41 may be omitted, and a lottery result such as a winning / failing lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  In addition, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34, a non-supportable mode in which the electric accessory 34a is not opened may be set instead of the low frequency support mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can win | win the game ball | bowl to the lower operation port 34, even if it is the condition where the electric accessory 34a is a closed state. This configuration may be applied to the second working port 302 in the second embodiment, or may be applied to the lower working port 34 in the eighth embodiment.

  In addition, the contents of the result display in the result display section AS of the main display section 43 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot type counter C2 for a predetermined jackpot result or special outlier result. May be.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the holding ball storage area 232 provided in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81 has a holding for the upper working port 33 (the first working port 301 in the second embodiment). A first result display area reservation area Ra is provided as an area, and a second result display area reservation area Rb is provided as a reservation area for the lower operation port 34 (second operation port 302 in the second embodiment). However, instead of this, an area capable of storing the hold information is provided for the total number of reservations of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34, and the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 are provided in each area. It is good also as a structure provided with the common holding | maintenance area in which the partial area which can store the information which corresponds is set. As each area of the common reserved area, for example, each area is configured as a storage area such as 1 byte, and a predetermined bit portion of the storage area corresponds to either the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 A configuration is possible in which the information is set as a partial area that can be stored. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 includes the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit.

  (14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the open / close execution mode corresponding to the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the open / close execution mode corresponding to the result of the special loss result are the same mode. Although the opening / closing execution mode related to the frequency winning mode is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure from which the opening restriction | limiting period of one big winning opening 32a differs in both opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the opening restriction period in the former opening / closing execution mode may be 0.20 sec, and the opening restriction period in the latter opening / closing execution mode may be 0.19 sec. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the open limit number of one big winning opening 32a is different in both opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the opening limit number in the former opening / closing execution mode may be set to ten, and the opening limit number in the latter opening / closing execution mode may be set to six. Note that this configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, in the winning lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1 in the main controller 81, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired for the lottery However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special loss occurrence lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to make a special loss result, a special loss lottery counter and a special loss lottery table are provided, and the jackpot random number counter C1 earned for the winning lottery If the value of the special off-lottery counter acquired when it is determined that the value is not a big hit win is a value that is set as a special off-winning value in the special off-lottery table, the special off A resulting configuration may be used.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, with respect to the big hit random number counter or the big hit type counter with the holding information related to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the holding information related to the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34 A different counter may be used.

  (17) Among the above embodiments, except for the ninth embodiment, the lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a (in the second embodiment, the second working port 302 is provided). The electric game object 302a) and the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 have different game balls according to the state of the electric game product 34a. May be changed. For example, it may be configured such that the electric work item 34a of the lower working port 34 is not provided and the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 do not differ in the ease of winning a game ball. However, in order to positively provide a state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur, it is preferable to provide an electric accessory 34a or the like in the lower working port 34.

  In addition, the configuration for switching the lower operation port 34 (the second operation port 302 in the second embodiment) between the open state and the closed state is not limited to that by the electric accessory 34a, and the lower operation port 34 The mouth 34 is provided so as to be able to enter and exit from the game board 24 with respect to the game area, and when it protrudes into the game area, a game ball can be won in the lower operation opening 34, and when it is submerged from the game area, the game to the lower operation opening 34 It may be configured such that it is difficult to win a ball.

  (18) In the first embodiment or the like, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41, the symbol variation is displayed on the upper working port 33 (the second embodiment). Then, it is displayed whether the game ball is won for the first operation port 301) or the game ball is won for the lower operation port 34 (the second operation port 302 in the second embodiment). The start corresponding display area may be set on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. In this case, the start corresponding display area may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34, and is common to the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. It is good also as a structure which sets an area | region and displays whether it is based on the display content in the said area | region which concerns on the winning opening.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened based on the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is not limited to two times, and the result is a special loss result. As long as it is the same as the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened, it is arbitrary. In addition, the big winning opening 32a is opened based on the number of times the big winning opening 32a is opened based on the result of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the 15R special big hit result and the normal big winning result. The number of times is also arbitrary.

  In addition, it is not essential that the reach display is generated in the game times corresponding to the special loss result or the game times corresponding to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the reach display may not be generated.

  Also, a variable winning device that is opened and closed in an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a special outage result and an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a normal jackpot result A variable winning device that is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode may be provided separately.

  Further, the probability of a special failure result in the winning / losing lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 is different from the probability of the special winning result in the winning / failing lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34. May be.

  Also, the type of jackpot result to be distributed when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the case of the low probability mode may be different when the winning lottery wins.

  (20) The timing for transmitting the operation winning command from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 may be delayed from the timing in the first embodiment or the like. In this case, for example, an operation winning command may be transmitted after the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated a predetermined number of times after a winning is generated at the upper operating port 33. In this case, in the configuration in which the operation winning command is transmitted as a command including the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the signal line that electrically connects the main controller 81 and the sound lamp controller 82 is illegal. Even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the current value of the jackpot random number counter C1 from the information of the operating winning command. However, the configuration in the third embodiment is preferable in that it is more difficult to perform such specification.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, the hold notification disabled state in which the hold notification is not reliably executed is set as the hold notification state. However, although the hold notification can be executed instead, the probability is low. The set hold notification low frequency state may be set.

  (22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the transition between the high probability mode and the low probability mode of the success / failure lottery mode is performed when the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is generated. For example, it may be configured to shift to the low-probability mode when a predetermined number of game times are consumed in the high-probability mode. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a high probability mode is entered when a predetermined number of game times are consumed in the low probability mode.

  In addition, when a lottery opportunity different from the jackpot lottery is established, the winning lottery mode transition lottery is performed, and when the winning lottery is promoted in the transition lottery, the low probability mode is changed to the high probability mode. In this case, the high probability mode may be switched to the low probability mode.

  (23) In the second embodiment, if the launch operation can be performed with the aim of winning only the first working port 301 out of the first working port 301 and the second working port 302, a game The positions of the first working port 301 and the second working port 302 in the region may be changed. For example, the first working port 301 may be disposed in the lower flow region 306 and the second working port 302 may be disposed in the upper flow region 305.

  Further, unlike the second embodiment, the launch operation can be performed only for the winning of the first working port 301 and the launch operation can be performed only for the winning of the second working port 302. As described above, the first working port 301 and the second working port 302 may be arranged and the position of the nail 38 in the game area may be set. For example, the first working port 301 may be arranged in the left flowing region 307 and the second working port 302 may be arranged in the right flowing region 308. In the configuration of the second embodiment, the flow direction of the game ball is restricted by the dispersing member such as the nail 38 so that the game ball flowing down the right flow area 308 does not flow to the first operation port 301 side. May be. In this case, it is possible for the player to clearly distinguish between a launch operation performed with the aim of winning the first operating port 301 and a launch operation performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 302.

  Further, in the upper flow area 305 or the lower flow area 306, the first operation port 301 and the second operation port 302 may be arranged by being shifted by a predetermined distance in the lateral direction. In this case, when a game ball is being fired toward the first position, a winning at the first operating port 301 may occur, but a winning at the second operating port 302 becomes impossible, and the first In the case where a game ball is being fired toward the second position, a configuration in which a winning to the second operation port 302 can occur may be employed.

  Alternatively, in the case where a game ball is being fired toward the first position, a winning configuration for the first operating port 301 and the second operating port 302 may be generated. However, in this case, the position of the dispersing member such as the nail 38 is set so that winning in the second working port 302 does not easily occur. In addition, when the game ball is being fired toward the second position, the nail 38 and the like are dispersed so that a winning is more likely to occur than when the game ball is being fired toward the first position. Set the position of the member.

  In addition, when a game ball is being fired toward the first position, both a winning at the first operating port 301 and a winning at the second operating port 302 can occur, and a game is played toward the second position. Even when a ball is being fired, both the winning to the first working port 301 and the winning to the second working port 302 can be generated, and the game ball is launched to the first position. If it is, the winning to the first operating port 301 is more likely to occur than the second operating port 302, and the second operation is performed more than the first operating port 301 when the game ball is being fired toward the second position. A dispersion member such as a nail 38 may be arranged so that winning in the mouth 302 is likely to occur.

  Note that this configuration may be applied to the ninth embodiment.

  (24) In the second embodiment, a single through gate may be provided instead of the pair of through gates 303 and 304. In this case, the single through gate is used to win a game ball when the game ball is being fired aiming at the first operation port 301 and when the game ball is being fired at the second operation port 302. For example, it may be arranged in the lower flow area 306 so that it can occur.

  (25) In the third embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result may correspond to the operation winning command on a one-to-one basis. However, the configuration in the third embodiment is preferable in that it is difficult to specify the value of the current jackpot random number counter C1 even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired.

  (26) In the third embodiment, information on the first specifying result specified by the first table of the hold notification table and information on the second specifying result specified by the second table of the hold notification table. The main controller 81 may transmit the command to the sound lamp controller 82 as separate commands.

  (27) In the third embodiment, the main control device 81 executes the notification generation lottery processing or the individual notification lottery processing, and the information based on the lottery result is sub-control device such as the voice lamp control device 82. It is good also as a structure which transmits to. Further, the content of the specific hold notification may be determined by the main control device 81, and information corresponding to the content of the hold notification may be transmitted to a sub-control device such as the audio lamp control device 82.

  (28) In the fourth embodiment, the lottery trigger for the hold notification start lottery process is not limited to the timing at which the special advantageous start command is received. For example, the game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result ends. In this case, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, each game time may be started. More specifically, the lottery trigger may be that a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, an ending command, an opening command, or a closing command is received.

  In addition, the lottery trigger for the hold notification end lottery process is not limited to the timing at which the ending command is received, for example, when a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot is completed, or when the opening / closing execution mode is started, Each game may be started. More specifically, the fact that a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, an open command, or a close command is received may be used as a lottery opportunity.

  (29) In the fourth embodiment, the subject that performs the hold notification start lottery process and the hold notification end lottery process is not limited to the voice lamp control device 82, and is, for example, the main control device 81. The display control device 212 may be the main configuration.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, it is good also as a structure which the main control apparatus 81 or the display control apparatus 212 does not perform the setting of a holding | maintenance alerting | reporting permission state or a pending | holding alerting | reporting prohibition state instead of the audio lamp control apparatus 82.

  (30) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, the conditions for the suspension notification disabled state in each embodiment may be applied after recombination with each other. Moreover, it is good also considering the conditions different from the said 4th-6th embodiment as the conditions used as a suspended alerting | reporting disabled state.

  (31) In each of the embodiments except for the sixth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the hold notification disabled state is set when it is not in the special advantageous state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each of the embodiments except for the sixth embodiment may be configured to be able to be set in the hold notification allowable state even in a situation that is not in the special advantageous state.

  (32) In the seventh embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a hold notification may be performed even if the winning / failing lottery mode is in the low probability mode. It is good also as a structure which can perform the pending | holding alert | reporting to the effect of jackpot result if it is alerting | reporting and high probability mode.

  (33) In the seventh embodiment, as a pending notification, at least one of a normal special jackpot result or a probability change dedicated jackpot result is notified, and a 15R probability variable jackpot result is not notified. It is good also as a structure.

  (34) In each of the above embodiments, the distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the probability variation jackpot result overlaps between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, but instead, the probability variation jackpot The distribution table may be set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a result and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a normal jackpot result do not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode, and at least 15R probability variable jackpot result The allocation table may be set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that becomes and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the normal jackpot result do not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

  The configuration of the distribution table is applied to the first embodiment in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the low probability mode is included in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the high probability mode. In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, the types of jackpot results include normal jackpot results dedicated to normal time (that is, low probability mode), probability variation jackpot results dedicated to normal time (that is, low probability mode) ( Or 15R probability variation jackpot result), there is a regular jackpot result dedicated to probability variation (ie, high probability mode) and a probability jackpot result (or 15R probability variation jackpot result) dedicated to probability variation (ie, high probability mode). That is, both in low probability mode) and in probability variation (ie, in high probability mode) Jackpot result (or 15R probability variation jackpot result) is not present. In this case, these jackpot results can be set as the subject of the hold notification. Note that the jackpot result type setting may be realized by differentiating the combination of the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table between the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

  In addition, although the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the normal jackpot result is duplicated, the distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the probability variation jackpot result is not duplicated in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Although the value of the big hit type counter C2 that is usually the big jackpot result overlaps, the distribution table is set so that the value of the big hit type counter C2 that is at least the 15R probability variation big hit result does not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may be set.

  Also, although the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is a probable jackpot result is duplicated, a distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is usually a jackpot result does not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. However, although the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is at least the 15R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, the distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is the normal jackpot result does not overlap between the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may be set.

  Further, the configuration of each of the above distribution tables is such that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the low probability mode is not included in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the high probability mode. You may apply to a form.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

  (35) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. Instead, the main control device is used. The display control device 212 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. In each embodiment except the third embodiment, the functions of the sound lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the sound lamp control device 82 may be configured. In addition, a configuration in which both functions of the display control device 212 are integrated in the main control device 81 may be adopted.

  (36) In the eighth embodiment, with regard to the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the second result display unit, hold notification may be performed in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The configuration may be such that the hold notification is not performed in the situation of the low frequency support mode, and the hold notification may be performed regardless of the support mode.

  (37) In the eighth embodiment, among the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb, the reservation information stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb When the game corresponds to the jackpot winning, the probability that a 15R probability variable jackpot result will occur is higher, so that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section is the game time A game result that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to occur when the hold information stored in the second result display section hold area Rb is the start target of the game times than when the start result is the start target. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, the hold information stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the hold information stored in the first result display area hold area Ra. It is good also as composition which becomes. In addition, all of the game results (that is, the gaming state) that are distributed because the holding information stored in the second result display area holding area Rb corresponds to the big win is the first result display area holding area. The hold information stored in Ra may be more advantageous to the player than the game result that is distributed by corresponding to the jackpot result.

  (38) In the ninth embodiment, the hold information stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb and the case where the hold information is won. The type of jackpot result to be distributed and the distribution ratio are the same when the held information is won, and the distribution ratio is the same if it is recognized that it is equivalent to the player May be slightly different.

  Further, the hold information stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb and the advantage for the player when the game round is to be started. The advantage for the player when the held information is the start of the game round may be such that the latter is more advantageous than the former as in the first embodiment. Contrary to the first embodiment, the former may be more advantageous than the latter. However, in the configuration in which both the first operating port 301 and the second operating port 311 are formed so that the ease of winning a prize does not vary depending on the gaming state, In view of the fact that when the launch operation is aimed at winning a prize and the launch operation is aimed at the other, the advantage for the player can be suppressed from becoming extremely high, the ninth implementation described above The configuration in the form is preferable.

  (39) In the ninth embodiment, the first result display area reservation area is the case where the reservation information stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is the start of game times. Although the long variable display time is more easily selected than the case where the hold information stored in Ra is the target for starting game times, this may be changed. For example, when the hold information stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is the start of game times, and the hold information stored in the second result display area hold area Rb is the start of game times. In either case, the common variation display time table may be referred to, so that the variation display time selection mode is not different between the two. Contrary to the ninth embodiment, the case where the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is the start target of the game times is for the second result display unit. It may be configured such that a longer variable display time can be easily selected than when the hold information stored in the hold area Rb is a game start target.

  (40) In the ninth embodiment, the first working port 301 and the second working port 311 may be provided side by side so that the two cannot be separated.

  (41) In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation winning command selection process and the hold notification confirmation process are based on information obtained based on winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 as hold information. Although it is configured to be executed after being stored in the area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb, it is not limited to this, and the selection process of the operation winning command and the confirmation process for holding notification are performed. After the information is acquired based on winning to the operation ports 33 and 34, before the information is stored as the hold information in the first result display portion reservation area Ra or the second result display portion reservation area Rb. It is good also as a structure performed.

  (42) In each of the above embodiments, even when the hold notification has already been made, the hold notification can be started for the hold information acquired based on the new winning to the operation ports 33 and 34. However, in a situation where a hold notification has already been performed, a new hold notification may not be started. That is, when the hold information is acquired based on a new winning to the operation ports 33 and 34, it is determined that the hold notification is already executed and the means for determining whether or not the hold notification is already executed. In this case, a configuration may be provided that includes a means for restricting the hold information from being executed for the hold information acquired based on the new winning. In this case, a plurality of hold notifications are not simultaneously executed, and the degree of attention to each hold notification can be increased.

  (43) When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the main control device 81 and no hold notification is executed for the hold information, a new winning is given to the operation ports 33 and 34. The hold notification may not be started for the hold information acquired based on the above. That is, means for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the already stored hold information when the hold information is acquired based on a new winning to the operation ports 33 and 34. And means for restricting the hold notification from being executed for the hold information acquired based on the new winning when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the big win is included. Also good. In this case, although hold notification is not executed for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, it is restricted that the hold notification is executed for other hold information, and the degree of attention to the hold notification is increased. It becomes possible.

  (44) In a situation where the hold notification is being executed in the plurality of unit hold display areas in the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb, the opening / closing execution mode for the hold information that has been the object of the determination of success / failure first. When the transition to, the suspension notification about the suspension information to be determined later is terminated at the predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode or at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure (namely, the structure which has a cancellation | release means of a hold alert | report). In this case, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the execution status of the hold notification can be reset once.

  (45) In each of the above embodiments, a state corresponding to the 15R probability variable jackpot result is set as a relatively advantageous predetermined gaming state, and a state corresponding to the normal jackpot result is a relatively disadvantageous predetermined gaming state. Although the configuration is set, it is not limited to this. For example, a relatively advantageous predetermined gaming state and an unfavorable predetermined gaming state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high frequency support mode is continued in the electric accessory 34a after the opening / closing execution mode. . Also, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and an unfavorable predetermined game state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is continued. In addition, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and an unfavorable predetermined game state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 34a enters the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode.

  (46) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn is started in the main display units 43 and 301 based on the determination of whether or not the main control device 81 has performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, when the conditions for determining whether or not the main control device 81 is determined are satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made after that. The subsequent variation display pattern, variation display time, and stop result in the game times may be determined based on the above. In this case, the main control device 81 first transmits a change start command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the change display time, and determines the type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 41.

  (47) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  (48) If the characteristic configuration of the first to ninth embodiments and the configuration of the other embodiments described above have the effect of being able to increase the degree of attention to the game well, Any combination may be applied to each other.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. Firing operation means (launching handle 54) operated by the player;
A launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a predetermined operation performed on the launch operation unit;
A starting entrance portion (first operation port 301, lower operation port 302) provided in the game region and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game region;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
A determination is made as to whether or not one special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Transition determination means (function to execute fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information if there is,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 301) and a second starting entering ball portion (second operating port 302) as the starting ball entering portion,
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means (data setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored Function to execute)
The special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is more than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means (MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, display) for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to be executed by the predetermined notification means (first holding display area Ga in the symbol display device 41) at the previous timing. MPU 252) of control device 212;
With
Further, the firing operation means is provided so that the player can perform a first predetermined operation, and is provided so that a second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation can be performed. And
The launching means launches the game ball toward the first position in the game area when firing the game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. In addition, when the game ball is to be launched based on the second predetermined operation being performed on the launch operation means, the game ball is launched toward the second position in the game area,
When a game ball is launched toward the first position by the launching means, a game ball can enter the first start entrance part, but the game ball enters the second start entrance part. It is difficult or impossible to enter a ball, and when a game ball is launched toward the second position by the launching means, a game ball can enter the second start entrance part, The gaming machine is characterized in that positions of the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion in the game area are set.

  In the gaming machine of feature A1, a transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired by the entry to the starting pitching section and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this configuration, a first start ball entrance portion and a second start ball entrance portion are provided as start ball entrance portions, and a first acquisition information storage device and a second acquisition information storage device are provided corresponding to each of them. Is provided. In this case, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. And the special information according to the special information which is the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not the target of the transition determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the transition determination. May be executed by predetermined notification means. Furthermore, for the player, depending on whether the first predetermined operation or the second predetermined operation is performed on the shooting operation means, the player may aim to enter the first starting entrance part or the second starting entrance part. You can aim to enter the ball. Therefore, in the case where the special notification is performed, the player aims to prevent entry to the second starting ball entering portion so that the transition determination is performed on the special information subjected to the special notification. Aiming to enter the second starting entrance part so that the launch operation is performed or the launch operation is stopped, or the transition determination is not performed on the special information subjected to the special notification. It is possible to change the mode of the launch operation according to the content of the special notification, such as performing the launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  In particular, when a first predetermined operation is performed on the launch operation means and a game ball is being fired toward the first position, a ball entering the first start ball entering portion may occur, 2 It is a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to enter the starting entrance part. Therefore, for the player, the first predetermined operation is performed with the aim of entering the first starting entrance part until the special notification is started, and when the special notification is started, depending on the content of the special notification Thus, the second predetermined operation can be performed with the aim of entering the second starting entrance part. This makes it possible to diversify the game contents of the game in which the active game and the passive game are related to each other.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, when a game ball is launched toward the first position by the launching means, a game ball can enter the first start entrance part but can enter the second start entrance part. It is difficult or impossible to enter the game ball, and when the game ball is launched toward the second position by the launching unit, the game ball can enter the second start entrance part. As such, when a game ball is launched toward the first position, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting entrance part, and the game ball is launched toward the second position. In this case, not only a configuration in which a game ball can enter the second start ball entering part but also a game ball that is fired toward the first position and a game toward the second position In any case where a ball is fired, a game ball can enter the second starting ball-entry part, but at the second position. Also included is a configuration in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start entrance portion when the game ball is fired than when the game ball is launched toward the first position. .

  Further, in the feature A1, with respect to the special information stored in the game acquisition operation device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine and the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means Then, the game determination operation is started by the transfer determination means or based on the determination that the transfer determination means is performed, and the game rotation operation is ended as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination. Game time control means for controlling the game time operation device so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game time. The “notification control unit” reflects “the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the target of the transition determination”. Instead of the configuration in which the separate notification is controlled by the predetermined notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination, The special notification reflecting the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is that the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information are started. Alternatively, the predetermined notification means may be controlled so that the predetermined notification means is executed at the previous timing.

Feature A2. The game area is provided with a dispersion member (such as a nail 38) in which the flow direction of the game ball is dispersed when the game ball flowing down the game area collides,
The dispersion member is arranged so that a game ball launched toward the first position by the launching unit can easily pass through the first path side in the game area, and the second position by the launching unit. Is arranged so that the game balls launched toward the second path side different from the first path in the game area can easily pass.
The first start ball entering portion is disposed at a position where at least a game ball flowing down or a game ball flowing down along the first route side can enter, and the second start ball entering portion is located in the second route. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein a gaming ball flowing down the side or a gaming ball flowing down is disposed at a position where the ball can enter.

  According to the feature A2, the player can aim to enter the first start entrance portion or perform the second start depending on whether the first predetermined operation or the second predetermined operation is performed on the shooting operation means. You can aim to enter the entrance area.

  The game area is provided with a game turn motion device that executes a predetermined action, and in a configuration in which the passing of a game ball in front of the game turn motion device is restricted, the game turn motion device is sandwiched between the game turn motion device and the game turn motion device. A path that passes through one of both sides in the width direction of the game area may be the first path, and a path that passes through the other may be the second path.

Feature A3. The dispersion member is arranged such that in the game area, there is a common reach area where both the game ball flowing down the first path side and the game ball flowing down the second path side can reach,
The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the first starting ball-in part is disposed in the common reach area.

  According to the feature A3, even if the player is performing the second predetermined operation on the launching operation means aiming at the entrance to the second start entrance part, the first start entrance Entry into the club may occur, and for the player, even if the player is aiming to enter the second start-up club, a privilege based on entering the first start-up club is obtained. It becomes possible.

Feature A4. A receiving opportunity entrance part (through gates 303 and 304) provided in the game area;
A non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to enter or impossible to enter than the first start entrance part, and the game ball enters the second start entrance part from the first start entrance part. An accepting drive unit (electric accessory driving unit 34b) that can be switched to an accepting state that is easy to ball,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance opportunity entrance part, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the second start entrance part is in the acceptance state, and the acceptance state is won in the lottery. On the basis of this, an acceptance control means for controlling the acceptance drive unit so that the second starting entrance ball portion is in the acceptance state (a function for executing a power combination support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). When,
With
The reception opportunity entrance portion can accept a game ball flowing down the first path side or a game ball flowing down, and a game ball flowing down the second path side or a game ball flowing down the second path side. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the gaming machine is provided so as to be able to enter a ball.

  According to the feature A4, for the player, a situation where the player is aiming to enter the first starting entry part and a situation where the player is aiming to enter the second starting entry part. In any case, the entry into the acceptance opportunity entry part may occur. Thereby, for example, even when the first predetermined operation is being performed aiming at entering the first starting entrance part until the special notification is started, entering the entrance entrance part is generated. After that, when the second predetermined operation is performed with the aim of entering the second starting entrance part, a situation in which the second starting entrance part is in the receiving state is likely to occur. In this case, for example, for a player who has performed a launch operation aiming at entering the second starting entrance part so that the transition determination is not performed on the special information subject to the special notification. Is more likely to occur in the second starting entry part immediately after performing the second predetermined operation aiming at entering the second starting entry part, and the special information subject to special notification On the other hand, it is possible to expect to enter the second starting entrance part at a timing before the transition determination is performed. In addition, even if it is a situation where the goal is to enter the second starting entrance part, the entrance to the entrance opportunity entrance part may occur. It can be expected that the occurrence of the acceptance state in will be repeated, and the transition determination is performed for the special information subject to special notification by repeatedly entering the second starting entrance part. Can not be.

  As a more specific configuration of the feature A4, the game area includes at least a first reception opportunity entrance (through gate 303) and a second acceptance opportunity entrance as the acceptance opportunity entrance. A ball portion (through gate 304) is provided, and the ball portion for the first reception opportunity is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down or flowing down the first path side can enter. In addition, a configuration may be conceived in which the second accepting opportunity entrance portion is disposed at a position where a game ball flowing down or flowing down the second path side can enter.

Feature A5. The acceptance control means is configured to switch the second starting ball-injection section between the non-acceptance state and the acceptance state, so that there is a relative chance that the acceptance state does not enter the acceptance state or per unit time. Having a low low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
The notification control unit sets a notification state in which the control of the predetermined notification unit can be performed so that the special notification is performed and a non-notification state in which the control is not performed, and a switching mode of the reception control unit Is provided with a notification state setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212), which is set to the notification state under at least one condition that the mode is the high-frequency switching mode. A gaming machine according to Feature A4.

  According to the feature A5, the special notification is performed in a situation in which the entry to the second start entrance portion is more likely to occur than the first start entrance portion. Thereby, for example, when it is considered that the shift determination is not performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, It is possible to continue the state in which the special information is stored in the second acquisition information storage unit, in which the shift determination is prioritized by performing the launch operation aiming at the occurrence, and accordingly, the special It is possible to prevent the migration determination from being performed on the special information related to the notification. That is, depending on the mode of the launch operation, it is possible to prevent the transition determination from being performed on special information that is not desired to be the transition determination.

  In addition, by applying the configuration of the feature A4 to the feature A5, the first predetermined operation is performed aiming at entering the first starting entrance part until the special notification is started, and thereafter When the second predetermined operation is performed aiming at entering the 2 start entry part, a situation in which the second start entry part is in the receiving state is likely to occur.

Feature A6. The acceptance control means includes
An acceptance information acquisition means (a function for executing a through-winning process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the acceptance opportunity entrance part;
Receiving information acquired by the receiving information acquiring means, a receiving acquisition information storage means (electrical power holding area 233 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81) for storing the receiving information as a plurality of numbers as a predetermined upper limit;
Whether or not one piece of received information stored in the received and acquired information storage unit corresponds to predetermined received and generated information is determined whether or not there is a plurality of pieces of received information in the received and acquired information storage unit. Is stored, the acceptance occurrence determination means for sequentially performing the acceptance occurrence determination with respect to the plurality of acceptance information (function to execute the processing of steps S1701 to S1717 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Based on the result of the acceptance occurrence determination by the acceptance occurrence determination means that the acceptance information to be determined corresponds to the acceptance occurrence information, the second starting ball entering unit is in the acceptance state. Receiving drive control means for controlling the receiving drive unit so as to be (a function for executing the electric utility opening and closing process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81);
A gaming machine according to Feature A4 or A5, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A6, even when the first predetermined operation is being performed aiming at entering the first starting entrance part until the special notification is started, the game ball enters the entrance opportunity entrance part. By receiving the ball, the acceptance information is acquired, and the acceptance information is stored in a pending manner up to a predetermined acceptance number as a plurality of numbers. Therefore, after that, when the second predetermined operation is started aiming at entering the second starting entrance part, even if the entrance to the entrance opportunity entrance part does not occur immediately, Since the acceptance occurrence determination is performed on the acceptance information that is stored on the hold, it is possible to suitably aim at entering the second starting entrance portion.

Feature A7. A game ball that has been launched from the launching means and has reached the upper side of the gaming area flows down the gaming area,
In any one of the features A1 to A6, the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion are arranged at positions shifted at least in the width direction of the game area in the game area. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A7, for the player, depending on whether the first predetermined operation or the second predetermined operation is performed on the shooting operation means, the player may aim to enter the first start entrance part, or the second start You can aim to enter the entrance area.

Feature A8. The firing operation means includes a rotating member that is pivotally supported, and the predetermined operation is to rotate the rotating member,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the first predetermined operation and the second predetermined operation have different amounts of rotation operation of the rotation member.

  According to the feature A8, the player can aim to enter the first starting entrance part or adjust the second starting entrance part by a relatively simple operation of adjusting the turning operation amount of the turning member. You can aim to enter the ball.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the first predetermined operation is set so that the rotation operation amount is smaller than that of the second predetermined operation.

  It is considered that the player performs the first predetermined operation more frequently than the second predetermined operation. In this case, according to this feature A9, the first predetermined operation is performed more frequently than the second predetermined operation. Since the dynamic operation amount is set to be small, it is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

  Note that any one of the features A1 to A9 may be applied to any one of the following features B1 to B7, features C1 to 12, and features D1 to D5.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting entrance part, a determination is made as to whether or not the game state is to be shifted to a predetermined game state, and a game is determined based on the result of the determination. Main control means (main control device 81) for shifting the state to the predetermined gaming state;
Sub-control means (voice lamp control device 82, display control device 212) for controlling predetermined notification means (first hold display area Ga in the symbol display device 41) based on the information output from the main control means,
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The main control means includes
Random number information updating means for updating predetermined random number information (function of executing the process of step S103 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Information acquisition means for acquiring, as special information, random number information updated by the random number information update means based on the game ball entering the first starting entrance part or the second starting entrance part A function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
First acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball has entered the first starting entrance part as a plurality of numbers, with a first predetermined number set as an upper limit. (Holding area Ra for the first result display section),
Second acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the second starting entrance section as a plurality of numbers, with a second predetermined number set in advance as an upper limit. (Second result display area reservation area Rb);
It is determined whether or not one special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and the first acquisition When a plurality of special information is stored in the information storage unit or the second acquired information storage unit, a transition determination unit that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information (variation in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) Function to execute the start process), and
State transition for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determining means that the transition target result indicates that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. Means (function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means (data setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored Function to execute)
The determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is specified at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Determination result specifying means (function for executing confirmation processing for hold notification in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Determination result output means for outputting information on the result specified by the determination result specifying means to the sub-control means (function for executing the operation winning command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
Based on the information output from the determination result output unit, the sub-control unit performs a special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination, and the predetermined special information Is executed at a timing prior to the transition determination target, notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function for executing command response processing in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82, display control) A game machine having a function of executing a hold notification control process in the MPU 252 of the device 212).

  In the gaming machine of feature B1, the transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired by entering the starting entrance part and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit as described above is given priority over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the first acquisition information The special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored in the storage means and is not subject to transition determination is sent to the predetermined notification means at a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. Expected to enter the second starting entrance part so that the transition operation is not performed for the special information subject to special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the main control unit has a function for executing the transition determination and the like, and the sub-control unit has a function for controlling the predetermined notification unit so as to perform the special notification, the function to each control unit And the processing load of the main control means can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the main control means has all functions.

  Furthermore, the main control means does not directly output the special information to the sub-control means when causing the sub-control means to execute the control for performing the special notification, but the special information is subjected to the transition determination. The determination result in the case is specified, and information on the specified result is output to the sub-control means. Therefore, even if information necessary for causing the sub-control unit to execute the control for performing the special notification is illegally acquired in the middle of output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, for example, The acquired information is not the special information itself but information of the identified result. In gaming machines that perform lottery using random number information, an act of attempting to illegally shift to a predetermined gaming state by illegally acquiring updated random number information is assumed. In this case, in the configuration in which the special information is output as it is, if the special information is illegally acquired, the currently updated random number information is illegally specified based on the acquired special information. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, since the information of the identified result is output instead of the special information itself, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved while suppressing the possibility of the fraud.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  In addition, in the feature B1, the game turn operation device provided at a position that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit Then, the game determination operation is started by the transfer determination means or based on the determination that the transfer determination means is performed, and the game rotation operation is ended as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination. Game time control means for controlling the game time operation device so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game time. And the “notification control means” is based on the information output from the determination result output means when the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination. In place of the configuration of “controlling the predetermined notification means so that the specific notification reflecting the predetermined result is executed at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination” Based on the information output from the determination result output means, a special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination is started, and a game time corresponding to the predetermined special information is started. The predetermined notification means may be controlled so as to be executed at a timing prior to being performed ".

  Feature B2. The determination result specifying means is stored or stored when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first start ball entering part is stored in the first acquisition information storage means. In this case, the game machine according to Feature B1, wherein the determination result is specified.

  According to the feature B2, when the control for performing the special notification is executed by the sub-control unit, the information to be output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit is specified. It is performed when the special information acquired by this is stored or stored in the first acquired information storage means. As a result, information necessary for causing the sub-control means to execute the control for performing the special notification is sent to the sub-control means at a relatively early timing after the game ball has entered the first starting ball-introducing section. When a special notification is made along with it, it can be started at a relatively early timing. Further, when special notification is performed, it is possible to start the special notification at a timing before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of transition determination.

Feature B3. A gaming operation device (main display unit 43) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit or based on the determination that the transition is performed. In response to the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game round, the game round is defined as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment. Game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the game time movement device so that a game turn operation of each game time is performed;
With
The determination result specifying means is stored or stored when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first start ball entering part is stored in the first acquisition information storage means. In this case, the game machine according to Feature B1, wherein the determination result is specified.

  According to the feature B3, when the control for performing the special notification is executed by the sub-control unit, the information to be output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit is specified. It is performed when the special information acquired by this is stored or stored in the first acquired information storage means. As a result, information necessary for causing the sub-control means to execute the control for performing the special notification is sent to the sub-control means at a relatively early timing after the game ball has entered the first starting ball-introducing section. When a special notification is made along with it, it can be started at a relatively early timing. Further, when the special notification is performed, the special notification can be started at a timing before the game times corresponding to the special information related to the special notification are started.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the “game turning operation device” is “a picture display means for performing a variable display of a picture”, the “game turning control means” is stored in the “first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means”. The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the stored special information, or based on the transition determination, the variation display of the picture is started, and the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed. The display of the variation of the pattern is terminated once as a game time, and the variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed according to the special information subject to the transition determination in each game time. A configuration may be adopted in which display control is performed on the pattern display means.

Feature B4. The game time control means is an operation continuation time determining means (function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for determining an operation continuation time when the game turn operation is performed in each game time. ), And when the operation for the game times of each game time is performed, the operation for the game times is finally stopped when the operation duration time determined by the operation duration determination means elapses.
The operation continuation time determination means continues the operation of the game times corresponding to special information different from the special information subject to the special notification in the situation where the special notification is being executed by the predetermined notification means. When determining the time, the operation continuation time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information that is the target of the special notification is the target of the transition determination. The gaming machine according to Feature B3.

  According to the feature B4, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification can be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature B5. The game times control means includes:
Information of operation duration when a game turning operation is performed in the game operation device is stored in advance, and operation duration information is stored in which a plurality of types of information of the operation duration are stored so that each operation duration is different. Means (variable display time table storage area 223 in the ROM 203 of the main controller 81);
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or based on the determination that the transition determination is performed. When the operation is started, based on the content of the special information that is the target of the transition determination, one of the information on the operation duration time stored in the operation duration information storage means is An operation continuation time selection means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for selecting information of operation continuation time;
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or based on the determination that the transition determination is performed. An action control means (of the main control device 81) that starts the action and finally stops the game turning action when the action duration corresponding to the action duration information selected by the action duration selection means has elapsed. The function of executing the process of step S815 in the MPU 202 and the function of executing the variation end process),
With
The operation continuation time selection means determines when the special information that is the target of the transition determination becomes the target of the transition determination at a timing later than the special information that is the target of selection of the information of the operation continuation time. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein information on the operation duration time is selected without reflecting a result.

  According to the feature B5, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification may be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature B6. The transition information corresponds to random number information that can be updated by the random number information update means, and a plurality of types of random number information correspond to the transition information,
The determination result specifying unit specifies that the predetermined special information is a special determination result when the predetermined special information is the first predetermined transfer information of the transfer information, and the predetermined special information is included in the transfer information. Even if it is the second predetermined transition information, the special determination result is specified,
The determination result output means outputs information of the special determination result to the sub-control means when the determination result specifying means specifies that the special determination result is the special determination result. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B6, since the transition information and the special determination result information do not correspond one-to-one, the special determination result information is set for a plurality of types of predetermined transition information. Even if the resulting information is illegally acquired in the middle of output from the main control means to the sub-control means, it is difficult to specify which random number information corresponds to the illegally acquired information It becomes possible.

Feature B7. The random number information updating means updates the random number information so that the random number information circulates within a predetermined numerical range.
The plurality of pieces of migration information identified as the special judgment result by the judgment result identifying unit is always when the random number information updating unit performs updating a specific number of times from random number information corresponding to any one piece of migration information. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein the game machine is set so that a situation in which random number information corresponding to other transfer information is generated does not occur.

  According to the feature B7, even if the information of the special determination result is illegally acquired in the middle of output from the main control means to the sub-control means, the illegally acquired information corresponds to any random number information. It is possible to make it difficult to identify whether or not

  Note that any one of the configurations B1 to B7 is applied to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A9 and the configuration of any one of the following features C1 to 12 and features D1 to D5. Also good.

Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
A determination is made as to whether or not one special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Transition determination means (function to execute fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information if there is,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
Further, when the special information is stored in the second acquired information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage unit. Priority means (data in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored in the means Function to execute the setting process),
The special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is more than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function for executing command response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so that the predetermined notification means is executed at the previous timing. Function for executing the hold notification control process in the
The notification control state with respect to the predetermined notification unit in the notification control unit, the notification permission state that enables the predetermined notification unit to be controlled so that the special notification is performed, or the special notification is performed. The notification state setting means (steps S3001 to S3009 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) is set to any one of the notification restriction states in which it is impossible to control the predetermined notification means or the frequency is lower than the notification permission state. And a function of executing the processing of steps S3201 to S3205, a function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3410 and steps S3501 to S3506 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, or a step of the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82. A function of executing the processing of 3605～ step S3612, a function) for executing the processing of step S2417~ step S2420 in MPU252 display control unit 212,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature C1, a transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired when the starting ball is generated and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit as described above is given priority over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the first acquisition information The special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored in the storage means and is not subject to transition determination is sent to the predetermined notification means at a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. Expected to enter the second starting entrance part so that the transition operation is not performed for the special information subject to special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  Moreover, since it is set to either the notification permission state in which special notification can be performed or the notification restriction state in which special notification is restricted, special notification can be performed according to the gaming situation, It is possible to restrict the notification to be performed, and diversification of games can be achieved through the execution of special notification.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, “a notification control state for the predetermined notification unit in the notification control unit, a notification permission state that enables the predetermined notification unit to be controlled so that the special notification is performed, or the special notification is performed. "Is set to one of the notification restriction states in which it is impossible to control the predetermined notification means or less frequently than the notification permission state". In addition to the configuration in which the special notification can be performed only in the state, the special notification can be performed in any of the notification permission state and the notification restriction state, but the frequency (or probability) of the special notification being notified is higher than that in the notification restriction state. A configuration in which the permitted state is set higher is also included.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  In addition, in the feature C1, with respect to the special operation information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit and the game turn operation device provided at a position that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine Then, the game determination operation is started by the transfer determination means or based on the determination that the transfer determination means is performed, and the game rotation operation is ended as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination. Game time control means for controlling the game time operation device so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game time. The “notification control unit” reflects “the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the target of the transition determination”. Instead of the configuration in which the separate notification is controlled by the predetermined notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination, The special notification reflecting the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is that the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information are started. Alternatively, the predetermined notification means may be controlled so that the predetermined notification means is executed at the previous timing.

Feature C2. A non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to enter or impossible to enter than the first start entrance part, and the game ball enters the second start entrance part from the first start entrance part. An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that can be switched to an acceptance state that is easy to ball,
The acceptance control means is a switching mode for switching the second starting ball-injection portion between the non-acceptance state and the acceptance state, and there is a relative chance that the acceptance state does not become the acceptance state or per unit time. Having a low low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
The notification state setting means sets the notification control state to the notification permission state under at least one condition that the switching mode of the acceptance control means is the high-frequency switching mode. A gaming machine according to Feature C1.

  According to the feature C2, special notification is performed in a situation in which entering the second starting entrance portion is more likely to occur than the first starting entrance portion. Thereby, for example, when it is considered that the shift determination is not performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, By performing the launch operation while expecting to occur, it becomes possible to continue the state in which the special information is stored in the second acquisition information storage means in which the transition determination is prioritized, and accordingly, the above-mentioned It is possible to prevent the migration determination from being performed on the special information related to the special notification.

  Feature C3. In the situation where the notification control state is set to the notification permission state, the notification state setting unit is in the case where the switching mode of the acceptance control unit is the low frequency switching mode or the low frequency switching mode. In the case, the gaming machine according to the feature C2, wherein the notification control state is set to the notification restriction state.

  In the low-frequency switching mode, it is difficult for a ball to enter the second starting ball entering portion, and therefore, for example, it is not desired that the transition determination be performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit. Even if the launch operation is performed by thinking that it is difficult to avoid it, there is a concern that the effect will be reduced even if special notification is performed in such a situation. In this case, according to the feature C3, since the execution of the special notification is restricted in the low-frequency switching mode, the special notification is not performed in a situation where the effect is small, and the degree of attention of the special notification can be increased. Become.

Feature C4. The transition determination means includes a high-probability transition determination means (function to execute the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination means (main And a function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81).
The notification state setting means sets the notification control state to the notification permission state under at least one condition that the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  According to the feature C4, special notification is performed in a situation where there is a high probability that a transition response result is obtained. Thereby, for example, before the transition determination is performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the transition is performed in the transition determination based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion. The launch operation can be performed while expecting a response result.

  Feature C5. In the situation where the notification state setting means is in the state where the notification control state is set to the notification permission state, when the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means, or when the situation is reached, The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the notification control state is set to the notification restriction state.

  In a situation where the probability of a transition response result is low, for example, before the transition determination is performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, Even if a launch operation is performed while expecting to be a transition response result in transition determination based on entry, it is difficult to achieve a transition response result, and even if special notification is performed in such a situation, the effect may be reduced. Concerned. In this case, according to the feature C5, since the execution of the special notification is limited in a situation where the probability of the transition response result is low, the special notification is not performed in a situation where the effect is small, and the degree of attention of the special notification is increased. It becomes possible to raise.

  Feature C6. The notification state setting means includes notification permission lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S3003 in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82) for performing lottery of whether or not to set the notification control state to the notification permission state. Any of the features C1 to C5, wherein the notification control state is set to the notification permission state on the condition that at least one condition is that the winning of the lottery by the notification permission lottery means is permitted. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature C6, the notification permission state is irregularly set, and the game is diversified.

Feature C7. A non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to enter or impossible to enter than the first start entrance part, and the game ball enters the second start entrance part from the first start entrance part. An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that can be switched to an acceptance state that is easy to ball,
The acceptance control means is a switching mode for switching the second starting ball-injection portion between the non-acceptance state and the acceptance state, and there is a relative chance that the acceptance state does not become the acceptance state or per unit time. Having a low low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
The notification permission lottery means, based on whether the switching mode is set from the low frequency switching mode to the high frequency switching mode or from the low frequency switching mode to the high frequency switching mode. The game machine according to Feature C6, wherein a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set the control state to the notification permission state.

  According to the feature C7, since the lottery trigger whether or not to set the notification permission state is associated with the fact that the switching mode is set to the high frequency switching mode, the second starting entrance is more than the first starting entrance portion. Special notification can be performed in a situation where a ball easily enters the club. Thereby, for example, when it is considered that the shift determination is not performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, By performing the launch operation while expecting to occur, it becomes possible to continue the state in which the special information is stored in the second acquisition information storage means in which the transition determination is prioritized, and accordingly, the above-mentioned It is possible to prevent the migration determination from being performed on the special information related to the special notification.

Feature C8. The transition determination means includes a high-probability transition determination means (function to execute the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination means (main And a function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81).
The notification permission lottery means, based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means or the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means. The gaming machine according to Feature C6 or C7, wherein a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a state is set to the notification permission state.

  According to the feature C8, since the lottery opportunity to determine whether or not to set the notification permission state is associated with the fact that the probability of becoming a transition correspondence result is set to a high situation, it is special in the situation where the probability of becoming a transition correspondence result is high Notification can be made. Thereby, for example, before the transition determination is performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the transition is performed in the transition determination based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion. The launch operation can be performed while expecting a response result.

Feature C9. A gaming operation device (main display unit 43) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit or based on the determination that the transition is performed. In response to the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game round, the game round is defined as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment. Game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the game time movement device so that a game turn operation of each game time is performed;
With
The notification state setting means continues to determine whether or not the number of game times continued in a state in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means does not become the transition response result has reached a predetermined continuation reference number. It is provided with a reference number determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S3403 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82), and at least one condition is that the continuation reference number determination means determines that the continuation reference number has been reached The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the notification control state is set to the notification permission state.

  According to the feature C9, since the notification permission state is set as a remedy for the case where the game times whose transition determination result is not the transition response result does not occur for at least the continuation reference number, the game times where the transition response result is not obtained. Even if the player continues, the game will be performed while expecting the occurrence of a special permission state in which a special notification can be executed, and the player's attention to the game can be suitably increased. .

  In addition, in the configuration in which the “game turning operation device” is “a picture display means for performing a variable display of a picture”, the “game turning control means” is stored in the “first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means”. The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the stored special information, or based on the transition determination, the variation display of the picture is started, and the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed. The display of the variation of the pattern is terminated once as a game time, and the variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed according to the special information subject to the transition determination in each game time. A configuration may be adopted in which display control is performed on the pattern display means.

Feature C10. A gaming operation device (main display unit 43) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit or based on the determination that the transition is performed. In response to the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game round, the game round is defined as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment. Game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the game time movement device so that a game turn operation of each game time is performed;
With
The notification state setting means determines whether or not the number of game times that have continued since the notification control state has changed from the notification permission state to the notification disabled state has reached a predetermined continuation reference number. Provided with a number-of-times determining means (function of executing the processing of step S3605 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82), and at least one condition that the continuation reference number of times is determined by the continuation reference number-of-times determining means The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the notification control state is set to the notification permission state.

  According to the feature C10, the notification permission state is periodically set, and the player's attention to the game can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the “game turning operation device” is “a picture display means for performing a variable display of a picture”, the “game turning control means” is stored in the “first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means”. The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the stored special information, or based on the transition determination, the variation display of the picture is started, and the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed. The display of the variation of the pattern is terminated once as a game time, and the variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed according to the special information subject to the transition determination in each game time. A configuration may be adopted in which display control is performed on the pattern display means.

  Feature C11. The notification state setting means includes notification restriction lottery means (a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82) for performing lottery of whether or not to set the notification control state to the notification restriction state. And the notification control state is set to the notification restriction state under at least one condition that the restriction has been generated in the lottery by the notification restriction lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C11, the notification restriction state is irregularly set, and the game is diversified.

Feature C12. Main control means (main control device 81) having the information acquisition means, the acquisition information storage means, the transition determination means, the state transition means and the priority means;
Sub control means (sound lamp control device 82, display control device 212) having the notification control means and the notification state setting means;
With
The sub-control unit performs control of the predetermined notification unit and sets the notification control state based on information output from the main control unit. C1 to C11 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C12, in the configuration in which the main control unit has a function for executing the transition determination and the like, and the sub-control unit has a function for controlling the predetermined notification unit so as to perform the special notification, each control The functions are distributed to the means, and the processing load of the main control means can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the main control means has all the functions.

  The configuration of any one of the features C1 to C12 is applied to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A9 and the features B1 to B7 and the configuration of any one of the following features D1 to D5. May be.

Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
A determination is made as to whether or not one special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Transition determination means (function to execute fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information if there is,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means (data setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored Function to execute)
The special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is more than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function for executing command response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so that the predetermined notification means is executed at the previous timing. Function for executing the hold notification control process in the
With
Further, the transition determination means includes a high probability transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low probability transition determination means in which the probability of the transition correspondence result is relatively high or low. (The function of executing the processing of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The transition information that is the transition correspondence result in the high probability transition determination means and the transition information that is the transition correspondence result in the low probability transition determination means are set to be different from each other,
The notification control means includes
Whether the predetermined special information is the target of transition determination by the high probability transition determination means, whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained, or whether the predetermined special information is the target of transition determination by the low probability transition determination means Notification side determination means for determining at least one of whether or not the transition response result is obtained (the function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, step S2401 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) , The function of executing the processing of step S2406 and step S2411),
Based on the determination result of the notification side determination means, the special notification is notified as to whether or not the special information determined by the notification side determination means corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state. Special notification executing means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function for executing the processing of step S2404, step S2405, step S2409, step S2410, step S2412 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature D1, a transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired by the entry to the starting pitching unit and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations.

  Further, in the configuration in which the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as described above, the first acquisition information The special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored in the storage means and is not subject to transition determination is sent to the predetermined notification means at a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. Expected to enter the second starting entrance part so that the transition operation is not performed for the special information subject to special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation.

  In particular, the transition information in a situation where the probability of a transition response result is low is different from the transition information in a situation where the probability of a transition response result is high, and as a special notification, the transition correspondence result is obtained in a situation where the probability is low. Notification regarding at least one of whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained in a situation where the probability is high is performed. Thus, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is obtained if the probability is low, the special information related to the special notification is subject to the transition determination. The player can recognize that the transition response result does not occur unless the above probability is low. Then, the player causes the second start information to be entered so that the probability is low before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. It is considered that the launch operation is performed in the hope that the state where the special information is stored in the storage means will be continued. On the other hand, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification is made that a transition response result is obtained in this situation, the special information related to the special notification is subject to transition determination. If the probability is low, the player can recognize that the transition response result does not occur. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. Is possible.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  Further, in the feature D1, with respect to the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, the game turn operation device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine Then, the game determination operation is started by the transfer determination means or based on the determination that the transfer determination means is performed, and the game rotation operation is ended as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination. Game time control means for controlling the game time operation device so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game time. The “notification control unit” reflects “the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the target of the transition determination”. Instead of the configuration in which the separate notification is controlled by the predetermined notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination, The special notification reflecting the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is that the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information are started. Alternatively, the predetermined notification means may be controlled so that the predetermined notification means is executed at the previous timing.

Feature D2. The notification side determination means has the predetermined special information in one of the situations where the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means or the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means. Different situation notification side determination means (such as a function of executing the processing of step S3705 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) for determining whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained when the transition determination is made. And
The special notification execution unit may determine whether the special information determined by the different situation notification side determination unit is the other status as the special notification based on the determination result of the different situation notification side determination unit. For example, the special notification execution unit for different situations that controls the predetermined notification unit so that the information corresponding to the transition response result is notified (the processing of step S3706 in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82 is performed). The gaming machine according to Feature D1, further comprising a function of executing a hold notification process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 based on the execution.

  According to the feature D2, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is obtained if the probability is low, the special information related to the special notification is determined as a transition determination. The player can recognize that the transition correspondence result does not occur unless the probability is low before the target is selected. Then, the player causes the second start information to be entered so that the probability is low before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. It is considered that the launch operation is performed in the hope that the state where the special information is stored in the storage means will be continued.

Feature D3. In the notification side determination means, in one of the situations where the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means or the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means, the predetermined special information is stored in the situation. The same situation notification side determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S3703 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) for determining whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained when the transition determination is made is provided. And
The special notification execution means, based on the determination result of the same situation notification side determination means, as the special notification, if the special information determined by the same situation notification side determination means is the current situation Same-situation special notification execution means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the information corresponding to the transition response result is notified (the process of step S3704 is executed in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, further comprising a function of executing a hold notification process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 based on the above.

  According to the feature D3, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is obtained in the situation, the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination. The player can recognize that the transition correspondence result does not occur if the probability becomes low until the above. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

Feature D4. Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult to enter;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the big winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Grant means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
With
When the gaming state transitions to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the transition determination by the high probability transition determination unit being the transition correspondence result, and the result of the transition determination by the low probability transition determination unit is the transition correspondence In any case where the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result, the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching means is a predetermined number. The game machine according to any one of means D1 to D3, wherein the variable entry control by the variable entry means is performed.

  According to the feature D4, for example, in a situation where the probability of a transition response result is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is given if the probability is low, a special notification related to the special notification is given. If the above probability is not low before the information is subject to transition determination, the player cannot obtain an opportunity to acquire a game ball that is generated by opening / closing the variable ball entry means. Can be recognized. Then, the player causes the second start information to be entered so that the probability is low before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. It is considered that the launch operation is performed in the hope that the state where the special information is stored in the storage means will be continued. On the other hand, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification is made that a transition response result is obtained in this situation, the special information related to the special notification is subject to transition determination. If the probability becomes low, the player can recognize that an opportunity to acquire a game ball generated by opening / closing the variable ball entry means cannot be obtained. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. Is possible.

Feature D5. Transition information storage means for preliminarily storing the transition information (distribution table storage area 222 in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81) is provided, and the transition information storage means includes first transition information and second transition information as the transition information. Pre-stored,
The state transition means includes
When the transition determination is performed based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit that corresponds to the first transition information, the high probability transition determination unit and Of the low probability transition determination means, first state transition means (step S1611 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) for transitioning the gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means. To the function of executing the process of step S1613),
When the transition determination is performed based on the result of the transition determination that the transition determination by the transition determination unit corresponds to the second transition information, the high probability transition determination unit and Of the low probability transition determination means, second state transition means (step S1602 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) for transitioning the gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state where the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means. To execute the process of step S1605),
With
Both the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition determination unit determine whether the special information corresponds to either the first transition information or the second transition information as the transition determination. ,
The first transition information that is the first transition correspondence result in the high probability transition determination unit and the first transition information that is the first transition correspondence result in the low probability transition determination unit are set to be different from each other. With
The second transition information that is the second transition correspondence result in the high probability transition determination means and the second transition information that is the second transition correspondence result in the low probability transition determination means are set to be different from each other. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

  According to the feature D5, in the configuration in which the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state, which have different advantages as the predetermined gaming state, are set, for example, as a special notification, the transition to each predetermined gaming state is supported. The special notification is diversified by allowing the notification to be performed.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, for example, in the second predetermined gaming state, when a special notification that a transition response result is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the special information related to the special notification is provided. If the first predetermined gaming state is not reached before the transition is determined, the player can recognize that the transition response result does not occur. Then, the player can make a transition to the first predetermined gaming state based on the special information acquired based on the entry to the second starting entry part until the special information related to the special notification becomes the subject of the transition determination. Expecting to occur, it is considered that the launch operation is performed.

  On the other hand, for example, in the second predetermined gaming state, when a special notification is made that a transition response result is obtained in the second predetermined gaming state, the special information related to the special notification is subject to transition determination. If the transition to the first predetermined gaming state occurs due to the special information acquired based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion until the player becomes, the player will confirm that the transition correspondence result does not occur. Can be recognized. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. Is possible.

  Note that the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D5 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B7, and the features C1 to C12.

Feature E1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
A determination is made as to whether or not one special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Transition determination means (function to execute fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information if there is,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
Further, when the special information is stored in the second acquired information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage unit. Priority means (data in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored in the means Function to execute the setting process),
The special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is more than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means (MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, display) for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to be executed by the predetermined notification means (first holding display area Ga in the symbol display device 41) at the previous timing. MPU 252) of control device 212;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature E1, a transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired by the entry to the starting pitching unit and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit as described above is given priority over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the first acquisition information The special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored in the storage means and is not subject to transition determination is sent to the predetermined notification means at a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. Expected to enter the second starting entrance part so that the transition operation is not performed for the special information subject to special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  Further, in the feature E1, with respect to the special information stored in the game acquisition operation device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine and the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit Then, the game determination operation is started by the transfer determination means or based on the determination that the transfer determination means is performed, and the game rotation operation is ended as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination. Game time control means for controlling the game time operation device so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game time. The “notification control unit” reflects “the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the target of the transition determination”. Instead of the configuration in which the separate notification is controlled by the predetermined notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination, The special notification reflecting the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is that the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information are started. Alternatively, the predetermined notification means may be controlled so that the predetermined notification means is executed at the previous timing.

Feature E2. The notification control means includes
When the special information that is stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to transition determination by the transition determination means Notification side determination means for determining whether or not the result is obtained (the function of executing the first correspondence process in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, the processing of steps S2501, S2506, and S2511 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function)
Based on the determination result of the notification side determination unit, the predetermined notification is performed so as to notify whether or not the special information determined by the notification side determination unit corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state. Special notification execution means for controlling the means (function for executing the processing of step S2504, step S2505, step S2509, step S2510, step S2512 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further comprising:

  According to the feature E2, since it is notified whether or not the special information to be notified corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state as a special notification, the player is notified of the special information that is the target of the special notification. In order to make a transition determination, the launch operation is performed or the launch operation is canceled while expecting that no entry into the second starting entrance part will occur, or for special information subject to special notification Therefore, a change in consciousness may occur depending on the content of the special notification, such as performing a launch operation in the hope that no entry into the second start entry portion will occur, so that the transition determination is not performed.

  Note that the “special notification execution means” includes not only a configuration in which special notification is always performed, but also a configuration in which a special lottery is performed when a predetermined lottery is won. Specifically, in the latter case, the special notification execution means includes notification execution lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S2305 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the special notification. Based on the fact that the notification execution lottery means that the notification execution has been won, notification is made as to whether or not the special information determined by the notification side determination means corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state. It is preferable that the predetermined notification means is controlled.

  Also, a notification state and a non-notification state may be set, and a special notification may be performed in the notification state. In this case, a special notification may be always performed in the notification state, and a special notification may be performed when a winning is made in a predetermined lottery.

Feature E3. Transition information storage means for preliminarily storing the transition information (distribution table storage area 222 in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81) is provided, and the transition information storage means includes first transition information and second transition information as the transition information. Pre-stored,
The state transition means includes
A first predetermined game which is a kind of the predetermined game state based on a result of the first transition correspondence that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the first transition information. First state transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1611 to S1613 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to transition to a state;
The gaming state is a kind of the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the second transition correspondence result that corresponds to the second transition information. Second state transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1602 to S1605 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for shifting to a second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state;
The gaming machine according to Feature E2, further comprising:

  According to the feature E3, in the configuration in which the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state, which have different advantages as the predetermined gaming state, are set, for example, as a special notification, the transition to each predetermined gaming state is supported. The special notification is diversified by allowing the notification to be performed.

  The configuration of the feature E3 can also be applied to the configuration of the feature E1 and other configurations without requiring the characteristic configuration limited in the feature E2.

  The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state may be the following gaming states. That is, a variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, Variable entry control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to a closed state after the variable entry means is opened, and the variable entry Providing means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the device, and the variable ball entry control means moves to the first state. When the game state transitions to the first predetermined gaming state by the means, the variable entry control until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable entry means reaches a predetermined number. When the game state transition to the second predetermined game state occurs by the second state transition unit, the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching unit is a predetermined number of times It is good also as a structure which performs the said variable pitch control until it becomes. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state can be obtained by changing the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching means and the one-time opening time to change the expected value of the game ball. It is good also as a structure which provides a difference in advantage.

  In addition, the transition determination unit includes a high probability transition determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low probability transition determination unit in which the probability of the transition correspondence result is relatively high or low. (The function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81), and when the transition determination is performed, the first predetermined gaming state includes the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition Among the determination means, the game state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination unit, and the second predetermined gaming state is the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition when the transition determination is performed. Among the determination means, the first predetermined gaming state and the second place are configured such that the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit. The difference may be provided to advantage in a gaming state.

Feature E4. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. The first notification side determination means for determining whether or not the first transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, processing in step S2511 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute)
In the second predetermined gaming state, the special notification execution unit is configured to display the first predetermined game based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit. First special notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2512 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not the state transition is supported is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein:

  According to the feature E4, in the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as a special notification corresponds to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state. There may be cases where the content of the content is reported. Then, the player stores the first predetermined game such as a new transition to the second predetermined gaming state or the stay of the second predetermined gaming state in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination has priority. It is expected that special information will be stored that has a more favorable result than the transition to the state. The player who has thus expected the launch operation while expecting the entry to the second start entry part so that the transition determination is not performed on the special information that is the target of the special notification. Will be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature E5. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. The second notification side determination means for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82, step S2501 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, step And a function for executing the processing of S2506)
Whether the special notification execution means corresponds to the transition of the second predetermined gaming state based on the determination result of the second notification side determination means, based on the determination result of the second notification side determination means. Second special notification executing means for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not (function of executing the processing of step S2504, step S2505, step S2509, and step S2510 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). The gaming machine according to Feature E3 or E4, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature E5, there may be a notification of the content that the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as the special notification corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. Then, for example, the player performs a launch operation while expecting that no entry into the second starting entry part will occur, so that the transition determination is performed on the special information that is the subject of the special notification. Perform or abort the firing operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature E6. Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult to enter;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the big winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Grant means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
With
When the game state transition to the first predetermined game state occurs by the first state transition unit, until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching unit reaches a predetermined number of times The variable entry control by the variable entry control means is performed and the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed,
When the game state transition to the second predetermined game state occurs by the second state transition unit, until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching unit reaches a predetermined number The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed.

  According to feature E6, the variable pitching means is opened and closed in both cases where the transition to the first predetermined gaming state and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state occur, and the player You can get an opportunity to win.

Feature E7. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. The first notification side determination means for determining whether or not the first transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, processing in step S2511 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute)
In the second predetermined gaming state, the special notification execution unit is configured to display the first predetermined game based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit. First special notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2512 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not the state transition is supported is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein:

  According to the feature E7, in the second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as a special notification corresponds to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state. There may be cases where the content of the content is reported. In this case, the player determines that the acquisition of the game ball can be expected by performing opening / closing of the variable ball entry means by performing the transition determination on the special information that is the target of the special notification. On the other hand, in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination is to be prioritized, for example, a new transition to the second predetermined gaming state or a transition to the first predetermined gaming state such as maintaining a stay in the second predetermined gaming state. It is expected that special information that yields more advantageous results will be stored. The player who has thus expected the launch operation while expecting the entry to the second start entry part so that the transition determination is not performed on the special information that is the target of the special notification. Will be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  Note that the “granting means” includes not only a configuration for directly granting a game ball but also a configuration for indirectly granting a game ball by granting a virtual game ball.

Feature E8. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. The second notification side determination means for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82, step S2501 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, step And a function for executing the processing of S2506)
In the second predetermined gaming state, the special notification execution unit is configured to make the special information determined by the second notification side determination unit based on the determination result of the second notification side determination unit in the second predetermined game state. Second special notification execution means (step S2504, step S2505, step S2509, step S2510 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that controls the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not the state transition is supported. (8) A gaming machine according to the feature E6 or E7.

  According to feature E8, in the second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means as a special notification corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. There may be cases where the content of the content is reported. In this case, the player determines that the acquisition of the game ball can be expected by performing opening / closing of the variable ball entry means by performing the transition determination on the special information that is the target of the special notification. . Then, before the special information corresponding to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is stored in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination is to be prioritized, the special information subject to the above-described special notification Thus, the launch operation is performed or the launch operation is stopped while expecting that no entry into the second start entry portion is generated so that the transition determination is performed. On the other hand, before the transition determination is performed on the special information that is the subject of the special notification, the second acquisition information storage means that the transition determination is prioritized, the special information corresponding to the acquisition of further benefits. So as to be memorized, the launch operation is performed while expecting the entry to the second start entry part. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature E9. The transition determination unit includes at least a high probability transition determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low probability transition determination in which the probability that the second transition correspondence result is relatively high or low Means (function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination unit among the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition determination unit when the transition determination is performed,
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit among the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition determination unit when the transition determination is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature E8, characterized in that

  According to feature E9, the second predetermined gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state because the probability that the second predetermined gaming state will be at least the second transition corresponding result is higher than the first predetermined gaming state. It will be something.

Feature E10. The second notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not subject to transition determination, and is subject to transition determination by the high probability transition determination means. Common information determination means (MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained both in the case of becoming the target of the transition determination by the low probability transition determination means. A function for executing the first response process in step S2506 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In the second predetermined gaming state, the second special notification execution unit is configured to determine that the special information determined by the common information determination unit is the high probability transition determination unit based on the determination result of the common information determination unit. Whether or not it corresponds to the common information that is the result of the second transition correspondence is notified both in the case of being subject to transition judgment by the above and in the case of being subject to transition judgment by the low probability transition judging means. The gaming machine according to Feature E9, further comprising common information notification executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2510 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means.

According to the feature E10, in the second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as the special notification is the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. Any of the states may be notified of the content that corresponds to the common information that will cause the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, even if the special information corresponding to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is newly stored in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination is to be prioritized, It can be determined that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state occurs again by performing the transition determination on the special information that is the target of the special notification. Then, before the transition determination is performed on the special information targeted for the special notification, special information corresponding to acquisition of a further privilege is stored in the second acquisition information storage unit in which the transition determination is prioritized. As stored, the launching operation is performed while expecting the entrance to the second start entrance part. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.
Feature E11. The second notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not subject to transition determination, and is subject to transition determination by the high probability transition determination means. High probability dedicated information determination means for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained when the second transition response result is obtained, and when the second transition correspondence result is not obtained when the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means. (The function of executing the first corresponding process in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, the function of executing the process of step S2501 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),

  In the second predetermined gaming state, the second special notification execution unit is configured to determine that the special information determined by the high probability dedicated information determination unit is based on the determination result of the high probability dedicated information determination unit. Dedicated to high-probability that results in the second transition response when it becomes a transition determination target by the probability transition determination means and does not become the second transition response result when it becomes a transition determination target by the low-probability transition determination means A high-probability dedicated information notification execution unit (a function of executing the processing of step S2505 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that controls the predetermined notification unit so as to notify whether or not it corresponds to information; The gaming machine according to Feature E9 or E10, wherein:

  According to the feature E11, in the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as the special notification is the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. A notification may be made that the content corresponds to the high-probability dedicated information that will cause the transition to the second predetermined gaming state only in the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, the player newly stores special information corresponding to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination has priority, and the special information is determined as the transition determination. If the gaming state has shifted to the first predetermined gaming state, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is made even if a transition determination is made for the special information that is the subject of the special notification. It can be determined that it does not occur. Then, the player performs the launch operation or stops the launch operation in the expectation that no entry into the second start entry portion will occur. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature E12. The special information that becomes the second transition correspondence result in the transition determination by the low probability transition determination means is configured to be the second transition correspondence result in the transition determination by the high probability transition determination means,
The second special notification execution unit is configured to transfer the special information that is the determination target by the second notification side determination unit or the transition by the low probability transition determination unit when the special information is the target of the transition determination by the high probability transition determination unit. In the case where the information is a result of the second transition correspondence in any one of the cases where the determination is made, the special information which is the determination target by the second notification side determination means in the second predetermined gaming state. Arbitrary notification execution means for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is supported (the processing of steps S2504 and S2509 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is executed) The gaming machine according to feature E10 or E11, wherein

  According to the feature E12, since the special information that becomes the second transition correspondence result in the first predetermined gaming state becomes the second transition correspondence result also in the second predetermined gaming state, the second predetermined gaming state has the first predetermined correspondence state. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of information that should be stored in the gaming machine, in order to increase the probability that the second transition correspondence result is higher than the gaming state.

  In this case, in the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means as the special notification is the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. In any case, regardless of whether or not the information corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state, notification that the special information corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed. Then, when the special notification is made, the player has the special information corresponding to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state only in the second predetermined gaming state or the first predetermined gaming state. It is necessary to predict whether the information is special information corresponding to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. Then, in response to the prediction, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that the transition determination is performed on the special information that is the subject of the special notification. Expecting to enter the second starting entrance part so that the launch operation is performed or the launch operation is stopped, or the transition determination is not performed on the special information subject to the special notification. It is possible to make a determination to perform a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature E13. A non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to enter or impossible to enter than the first start entrance part, and the game ball enters the second start entrance part from the first start entrance part. An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that can be switched to an acceptance state that is easy to ball,
The acceptance control means is a switching mode for switching the second starting ball-injection portion between the non-acceptance state and the acceptance state, and there is a relative chance that the acceptance state does not become the acceptance state or per unit time. Having a low low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
The notification control unit sets a notification state in which the control of the predetermined notification unit can be performed so that the special notification is performed and a non-notification state in which the control is not performed, and a switching mode of the reception control unit Characterized in that it is provided with notification state setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2318 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for setting the notification state in the situation where the high-frequency switching mode is set. Any one of the gaming machines.

According to the feature E13, special notification is performed in a situation in which entering the second starting entrance portion is more likely to occur than the first starting entrance portion. Thereby, for example, when it is considered that the shift determination is not performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, By performing the launch operation while expecting to occur, it becomes possible to continue the state in which the special information is stored in the second acquisition information storage means in which the transition determination is prioritized, and accordingly, the above-mentioned It is possible to prevent the migration determination from being performed on the special information related to the special notification.
Feature E14. The notification control means includes

A grasping means (display control device) for grasping a determination result when the special information is the object of the transition determination when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the first acquisition information storage means. 212, the function of executing the process of step S2307 in the MPU 242);
Grasping information storage means for storing the content grasped by the grasping means as grasping information (holding notification permission area 292 in the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212),
Notification information setting means for setting notification information so that special notification corresponding to the grasp information stored in the grasp information storage means is performed (for outputting an internal command to the VDP 255 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Processing)
Notification control execution means (VDP 255 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that notification corresponding to the notification information set by the notification information setting means is performed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E13, comprising:

  According to the feature E14, special notification can be performed in response to the special information being stored in the first acquisition information storage unit.

Feature E15. The notification control means includes
Number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and not subject to the transition judgment by the transition judging means (the process of step S2308 in the MPU 242 of the display control device 212 is executed) Function)
Number information storage means for storing information on the number of the special information grasped by the number grasping means (the hold notification disabled area 293 in the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212);
Notification state setting means (step S2318 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for setting a notification state in which the control of the predetermined notification means can be executed so that the special notification is performed and a non-notification state in which the control is not executed. The function of executing the process of step S2320),
With
The notification information setting means sets notification information corresponding to the grasp information stored in the grasp information storage means in the notice state, and stores in the number information storage means in the non-notification state. The gaming machine according to feature E14, wherein notification information corresponding to the number of pieces of information being set is set.

  According to the feature E15, it is possible to satisfactorily switch between a state in which the number of special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is notified and a state in which the special notification is performed. In addition, when the non-notification state is switched to the notification state, it is possible to immediately perform special notification for the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit at that timing.

Feature E16. In the situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information, and the timing acquired by the information acquisition unit is The transition determination is performed in order from early special information.
The notification control means controls the predetermined notification means so that the special notification is performed while clearly indicating the order of the transition determination of the special information related to the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of E15.

  According to the feature E16, since the special notification is performed while clearly indicating the order of the transition determination of the special information related to the special notification, the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is transferred. In the case where it is considered that the determination is not desired, when the player tries to generate a ball entering the second starting ball entering portion, the player can perform the launch operation while being aware of the order of the determination of the transition.

Feature E17. A gaming operation device (main display unit 43) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit or based on the determination that the transition is performed. In response to the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game round, the game round is defined as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment. Game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the game time movement device so that a game turn operation of each game time is performed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E16, comprising:

  According to the feature E17, the player can check the result of the transition determination in each game time by looking at the game time motion device.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the “game turning operation device” is “a picture display means for performing a variable display of a picture”, the “game turning control means” is stored in the “first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means”. The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the stored special information, or based on the transition determination, the variation display of the picture is started, and the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed. The display of the variation of the pattern is terminated once as a game time, and the variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed according to the special information subject to the transition determination in each game time. A configuration may be adopted in which display control is performed on the pattern display means.

Feature E18. The game time control means is an operation continuation time determining means (function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for determining an operation continuation time when the game turn operation is performed in each game time. ), And when the operation for the game times of each game time is performed, the operation for the game times is finally stopped when the operation duration time determined by the operation duration determination means elapses.
The operation continuation time determination means continues the operation of the game times corresponding to special information different from the special information subject to the special notification in the situation where the special notification is being executed by the predetermined notification means. When determining the time, the operation continuation time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information that is the target of the special notification is the target of the transition determination. The gaming machine according to feature E17.

  According to the feature E18, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification can be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature E19. The game times control means includes:
Information of operation duration when a game turning operation is performed in the game operation device is stored in advance, and operation duration information is stored in which a plurality of types of information of the operation duration are stored so that each operation duration is different. Means (variable display time table storage area 223 in the ROM 203 of the main controller 81);
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or based on the determination that the transition determination is performed. When the operation is started, based on the content of the special information that is the target of the transition determination, one of the information on the operation duration time stored in the operation duration information storage means is An operation continuation time selection means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for selecting information of operation continuation time;
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or based on the determination that the transition determination is performed. An action control means (of the main control device 81) that starts the action and finally stops the game turning action when the action duration corresponding to the action duration information selected by the action duration selection means has elapsed. The function of executing the process of step S815 in the MPU 202 and the function of executing the variation end process),
With
The operation continuation time selection means determines when the special information that is the target of the transition determination becomes the target of the transition determination at a timing later than the special information that is the target of selection of the information of the operation continuation time. The gaming machine according to Feature E17, wherein information on the operation duration time is selected without reflecting a result.

  According to the feature E19, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification can be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

  The configuration of any one of the features E2 to E19 is applied to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C12, and the features D1 to D5. Also good.

Feature F1. A starting entrance portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and into which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
A determination is made as to whether or not one special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Transition determination means (function to execute fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information if there is,
A gaming operation device (main display unit 43) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit or based on the determination that the transition is performed. In response to the special information that is subject to the transition determination in each game round, the game round is defined as a stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment. Game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the game time movement device so that a game turn operation of each game time is performed;
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information, the game times related to the special information are terminated. State transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined predetermined gaming state;
In gaming machines equipped with
The special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transition determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination. Notification control means (MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) that executes control so as to be executed by the game turn operation device or a predetermined notification means (first hold display area Ga in the symbol display device 41) different from that at the timing. MPU252) of the display control device 212,
Further, the game time control means executes operation continuation time determination means for determining an operation continuation time when the game turn operation is performed in each game time (execution processing for setting the variable display time in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 And the game turning operation is finally stopped when the operation continuation time determined by the operation continuation time determining means has elapsed. ,
The operation continuation time determination means continues the operation of the game times corresponding to special information different from the special information subject to the special notification in the situation where the special notification is being executed by the predetermined notification means. When determining the time, the operation continuation time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information that is the target of the special notification is the target of the transition determination. To play.

  In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, a game turning operation is performed in response to the game ball entering the starting ball entrance. For example, in a game time in which a big hit state occurs or in a game time in which a reach generation is won even in a game time in which a big hit state does not occur, a reach operation is performed in the middle of the game turn operation. Thus, by performing the reach operation, it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the game replay operation. However, even in such a configuration in which the reach operation is performed, it cannot be said that the player's attention is sufficiently increased, and there is still room for improvement.

  On the other hand, the structure which performs the special alerting | reporting according to the reference result with reference to the content of the reserved special information can be considered. However, there is a concern that the game may be extended if the performance is performed for an unnecessarily long time due to the special notification, and on the other hand, the preset performance is not performed at all. Then, the effect of the set production will be reduced.

  In the gaming machine having the configuration of the feature F1, special notification may be performed according to the content of the special information, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. In this case, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification can be performed. In the configuration, the time required to digest each game time is suppressed in accordance with the content of the special information related to the special notification.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the “game turning operation device” is “picture display means for performing variable display of the picture”, the “game time control means” is stored in the “first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means”. The transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the stored special information, or based on the transition determination, the variation display of the picture is started, and the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed. The display of the variation of the pattern is terminated once as a game time, and the variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed according to the special information subject to the transition determination in each game time. A configuration may be adopted in which display control is performed on the pattern display means.

  Further, in the feature E1, the “notification control unit” indicates that the special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit is the target of the transition determination is Instead of the configuration in which the control is executed so that the special information of the game is executed by the game turning operation device or a predetermined notification means different from the timing before the transition determination target, the acquisition is performed. The timing before the special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the information storage means is the target of the shift determination is before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information are started. The control may be performed so that the control is executed by the game turning operation device or by a predetermined notification means different from the above.

  Note that the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D5, and the features E1 to E19 is applied to the configuration of the feature F1. Also good.

Feature G1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a second state in which entry is difficult to enter;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a big winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the second state after the variable entry means is in the first state;
Grant means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination unit (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
With
The number of times that switching between the first state and the second state is performed in the variable pitching means by the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition unit is a predetermined number of times. In the gaming machine in which the variable entry control is performed until the state is reached, and the transition determination is not performed in the state in which the variable entry control is performed.
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
An acceptance control means (main control unit) capable of switching the second starting entrance part between a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which a game ball is easier to enter. A function of executing a power combination support process in the MPU 202 of the control device 81,
The acceptance control means includes a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode, as the control mode of the second starting and entering part. And in the state where the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means, the first mode is set.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit, and
The special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is more subject to determination by the transition determination unit than the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the determination target of the transition determination unit. It is configured so that the game result that is advantageous for the player is more likely to occur,
Further, when special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. If so, priority means (a function for executing data setting processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means,
At least in the situation of the second mode, a special notification reflecting a determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination, 62 and FIG. 62 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 for controlling the notifying unit so that the predetermined special information is executed by the notifying unit at a timing prior to the transition determination target. 63 for executing the processing shown in FIG.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature G1, at least a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as starting ball entering portions, and the second starting ball entering portion is switched between a non-accepting state and an accepting state. Since it is a structure, a change is given to the entrance mode of a game ball. In this case, in the state where the variable entrance control is performed on the variable entrance means, the first mode is set regardless of which mode the control mode of the second start entrance portion has been before. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of frequent entry into the second starting entry portion in a state where the variable entry control for the variable entry means is performed, and accordingly the exit rate in the state is extremely high. It is suppressed that it becomes high.

  In addition, a first acquisition information storage unit and a second acquisition information storage unit are provided corresponding to each of the first start entrance part and the second start entrance part, and are stored in the first acquisition information storage part. When the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means is subject to transition determination, a game result that is more advantageous to the player occurs than when special information that is subject to transition determination is present. It is configured to be easy. Therefore, it is considered that the player plays a game with the expectation of entering the second starting entrance portion of the first starting entrance portion and the second starting entrance portion.

  In particular, the second starting pitching part is switched between a non-accepting state and an accepting state, and the control mode is set to the first mode and the second mode that is more easily accepted. The special information stored in the two acquired information storage means is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. This allows the player to perform a launch operation in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance according to the status of the control mode of the second starting entrance, etc., or to the second starting entrance Diversification of expectations for launch operations, such as performing launch operations in anticipation of entering the game, will increase the level of attention of the game.

  Also, the special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means and is not subject to the transition determination, the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed by the notification means at the previous timing. Thereby, for the player, not only a game that causes the game ball to enter the starting pitching unit and a game for confirming the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the ball, but at least the second game When multiple pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, check the result when the transition judgment target is the target of the transition judgment, according to the contents of the special notification. A game of playing or guessing is added, and the game is diversified.

  In particular, when the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is subject to the transition determination as described above, a game result that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to occur, and further, the variable for the variable pitching means is variable. In the state in which the entrance control is performed, the first mode is set to the first mode regardless of which mode the control mode of the second start entrance portion has been before. In such a configuration, when a special notification is made that the predetermined special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to the transfer information in the situation of the second mode, the special information The player who has confirmed the notification changes the variable entry control so that the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means becomes the target of the transition determination immediately after the state where the variable entry control is performed is finished. It is considered that as much special information as possible is stored in the second acquired information storage means by causing the second start entering portion to be entered before the state where the starting is performed is started. . In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which the result of a transition determination is confirmed are related to each other. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  In addition, the game area includes a lottery opportunity entrance ball portion (through gate 35) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the acceptance control means is configured to input the lottery opportunity entrance ball portion. Acceptance lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the second starting entrance portion is in an acceptance state based on the occurrence of the entry (function to execute the processing of steps S1709 and S1715 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) It is good also as a structure which makes the said 2nd starting pitching part into the said acceptance state based on the fact that the lottery result of the said acceptance lottery means became acceptance winning. In this case, even if the second mode is set immediately after the state in which the variable pitch control is performed, the second start pitching unit does not enter the accepting state unless the lottery result of the accepting lottery means becomes the acceptance winning. Therefore, before starting the state in which the variable entry control is performed, the entry to the second start entry part is generated, and as much special information as possible is stored in the second acquisition information storage unit. The special advantage of the content that the predetermined special information stored in the second acquired information storage means corresponds to the transfer information in the situation of the second mode is enhanced accordingly. The advantage for the player that notification is performed is enhanced.

Feature G2. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult to enter;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the big winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Grant means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination unit (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
With
By the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition means, the number of times the switching between the open state and the closed state is performed in the variable pitching means becomes a predetermined number of times In the gaming machine in which the variable entry control is performed and the transition determination is not performed in the state in which the variable entry control is performed.
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
A non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to enter or impossible to enter than the first start entrance part, and the game ball enters the second start entrance part from the first start entrance part. An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that can be switched to an acceptance state that is easy to ball,
The acceptance control means includes a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) as a switching mode for switching the second starting ball-injecting portion between the non-accepting state and the accepting state, and the acceptance mode more than the first switching mode. And a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) that is likely to become a state, and is set to the first switching mode in a state where the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means. ,
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit, and
The special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is more subject to determination by the transition determination unit than the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the determination target of the transition determination unit. It is configured so that the game result that is advantageous for the player is more likely to occur,
Further, when special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. If so, priority means (a function for executing data setting processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means,
At least in the situation where the switching mode is the second switching mode, the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination is reflected. Notification control means for controlling the notification means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so that the special notification is performed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transition determination. In FIG. 62 and the function of executing the processing shown in FIG. 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of feature G2, at least a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as starting ball entering portions, and the second starting ball entering portion is switched between a non-accepting state and an accepting state. Since it is a structure, a change is given to the entrance mode of a game ball. In this case, in the state where the variable pitch control is performed on the variable pitch means, the first switching mode is set regardless of which mode the switching mode has been before. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of frequent entry into the second starting entry portion in a state where the variable entry control for the variable entry means is performed, and accordingly the exit rate in the state is extremely high. It is suppressed that it becomes high.

  In addition, a first acquisition information storage unit and a second acquisition information storage unit are provided corresponding to each of the first start entrance part and the second start entrance part, and are stored in the first acquisition information storage part. When the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means is subject to transition determination, a game result that is more advantageous to the player occurs than when special information that is subject to transition determination is present. It is configured to be easy. Therefore, it is considered that the player plays a game with the expectation of entering the second starting entrance portion of the first starting entrance portion and the second starting entrance portion.

  In particular, the second starting pitching part is switched between the non-accepting state and the accepting state, and the first switching mode and the second switching mode that is more likely to be in the accepting state are set as the switching mode. The special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the player expects to enter the first starting entrance part according to the switching mode situation or the like, or expects to enter the second starting entrance part. Diversification of expectations for launch operations, such as launch operations, can increase the level of attention of the game.

  Also, the special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means and is not subject to the transition determination, the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed by the notification means at the previous timing. Thereby, for the player, not only a game that causes the game ball to enter the starting pitching unit and a game for confirming the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the ball, but at least the second game When multiple pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, check the result when the transition judgment target is the target of the transition judgment, according to the contents of the special notification. A game of playing or guessing is added, and the game is diversified.

  In particular, when the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is subject to the transition determination as described above, a game result that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to occur, and further, the variable for the variable pitching means is variable. In the state in which the entrance control is performed, the first switching mode is set regardless of which mode the switching mode has been before. In such a configuration, when a special notification is made that the predetermined special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to the migration information in the situation of the second switching mode, The player who has confirmed the special notification can make the variable entry so that the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means becomes the target of the transition determination immediately after the state in which the variable entry control is performed ends. It is considered that as much special information as possible is stored in the second acquired information storage means by causing the second start entering part to be entered before the control state is started. It is done. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which the result of a transition determination is confirmed are related to each other. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  In addition, the game area includes a lottery opportunity entrance ball portion (through gate 35) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the acceptance control means is configured to input the lottery opportunity entrance ball portion. Acceptance lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the second starting entrance portion is in an acceptance state based on the occurrence of the entry (function to execute the processing of steps S1709 and S1715 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) It is good also as a structure which makes the said 2nd starting pitching part into the said acceptance state based on the fact that the lottery result of the said acceptance lottery means became acceptance winning. In this case, even if the second switching mode is set immediately after the state in which the variable pitch control is performed, the second start pitching unit is not in the receiving state unless the lottery result of the receiving lottery means is the winning winning. . Therefore, before starting the state in which the variable entry control is performed, the entry to the second start entry part is generated, and as much special information as possible is stored in the second acquisition information storage unit. In accordance with this, the content that the predetermined special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to the transfer information in the situation of the second switching mode is enhanced. The advantage for the player that the special notification is performed is increased.

Feature G3. The notification control means includes
The special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in or stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination, the predetermined special information is the transfer determination First notification control means for controlling the notification means so as to be executed by the notification means at a timing prior to the target;
The special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination, the predetermined special information is the transfer determination Second notification control means for controlling the notification means so as to be executed by the notification means at a timing prior to the target;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the second notification control unit is configured to perform the special notification at least in a situation where the switching mode is the second switching mode.

  According to the feature G3, since the special notification is also given to the special information stored or stored in the first acquisition information storage unit while achieving the effect of the feature G2, the degree of attention to the game is further increased. Is possible.

Feature G4. As the predetermined gaming state, a first predetermined gaming state (normal jackpot result) and a second predetermined gaming state (15R probability variable jackpot result) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state are set,
The state transition means stores the second acquisition information storage more than the case where the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means becomes the determination target of the transition determination means and the determination result becomes the transition correspondence result. When the special information stored in the means becomes the determination target of the transition determination means and the determination result is the transition response result, the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state are the first. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to easily shift to a predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature G4, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit becomes the target of the transition determination than the case where the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the target of the transition determination. In this case, a game result advantageous to the player is more likely to occur.

  Any one of the features G1 to G4, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E19, and the feature F1. Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied.

Feature H1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (first operation port 301, second operation port 311) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information and determines whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination unit (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first working port 301) and a second starting ball entering portion (second working port 311) as the starting ball entering portion.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
Further, when the special information is stored in the second acquired information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage unit. Priority means (data in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored in the means Function to execute the setting process),
The special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is more than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. The notification control means (MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, the display control device 212) that controls the notification means so that it is executed by the notification means (first holding display area Ga in the symbol display device 41) at the previous timing. MPU252),
With
Both the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion are formed such that the ease of entering a game ball does not vary depending on the game state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H1, the first starting ball entering part and the second starting ball entering part are provided as the starting ball entering parts, and the first acquisition information storage means and the second acquisition information storage means corresponding to each of them. And are provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. And the special information according to the special information which is the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not the target of the transition determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the transition determination. May be executed by the notification means. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  In particular, both the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion are formed so that the ease of entering the game ball does not vary depending on the game state. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of modes with different ease of entering a game ball into the second start entrance part are set, the game ball cannot enter the second start entrance part easily. It is impossible to provide a novel game in which the active game and the passive game are related to each other. In this case, if the frequency at which the game ball easily enters the second starting ball entering part is lowered, the opportunity for providing the novel game is reduced accordingly. Further, in a configuration in which a mode in which a game ball can easily enter the second starting entrance part is generated in a predetermined lottery, the above-described novel game is performed for a player who does not win in the lottery. Cannot be provided. On the other hand, both the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion are formed so that the ease of entering the game ball does not vary depending on the game state. A novel game can be provided to a player without causing the above-described restrictions.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

Feature H2. A launch operation means (launch handle 54) operated by a player is provided, and the launch means launches a game ball toward a game area based on a predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. Is,
Further, the firing operation means is provided so that the player can perform a first predetermined operation, and is provided so that a second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation can be performed. And
The launching means launches the game ball toward the first position in the game area when firing the game ball based on the first predetermined operation performed on the launch operation means. In addition, when the game ball is to be launched based on the second predetermined operation being performed on the launch operation means, the game ball is launched toward the second position in the game area,
When a game ball is launched toward the first position by the launching means, a game ball can enter the first start entrance part, but the game ball enters the second start entrance part. It is difficult or impossible to enter a ball, and when a game ball is launched toward the second position by the launching means, a game ball can enter the second start entrance part, The gaming machine according to claim H1, wherein positions of the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion in the game area are set.

  According to the feature H2, when the first predetermined operation is performed on the launch operation means and the game ball is being launched toward the first position, the entrance to the first start entrance portion is generated. Although it is obtained, it is a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the second starting entrance portion. Therefore, for the player, the first predetermined operation is performed with the aim of entering the first starting entrance part until the special notification is started, and when the special notification is started, depending on the content of the special notification Thus, the second predetermined operation can be performed with the aim of entering the second starting entrance part. This makes it possible to diversify the game contents of the game in which the active game and the passive game are related to each other.

  Feature H3. Advantages for the player when the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means becomes the determination target of the transition determination means, and the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means The game according to Feature H1 or H2, characterized in that it is recognized that the advantage for the player when it is determined by the transition determination means is equivalent to the player. Machine.

  According to the feature H3, both the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion are formed such that the ease of entering the game ball does not vary depending on the game state. In this case, the advantage for the player is extremely high when the launch operation is performed aiming at entering one of the starting entrance parts as compared with the case where the launch operation is aimed at the other. Is suppressed. Thereby, the effect of the feature H1 can be achieved while suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature H4. As the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of gaming states having mutually different advantages for the player are set,
The state transition means includes a case where the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means becomes a determination target of the transition determination means and the determination result becomes the transition correspondence result, and the second acquisition information storage means And the special information stored in the transition determination means becomes the determination target and the determination result is the transition correspondence result, and the types of predetermined gaming states that can be selected as the transition target and the selection probabilities of those predetermined gaming states The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be recognized as being equivalent to the player.

  According to the feature H4, the advantage for the player when the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the migration determination, and the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means It can be recognized that the advantage for the player in the case where is determined as a transition determination target is equivalent to the player.

Feature H5. Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, a game turn operation is started, corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means. As a result of the stop, the game round operation is terminated as one game round, and the game of each game round according to the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the notification means or the notification means different from the notification means so that the reusing operation is performed,
The game time control means includes an operation continuation time determining means (function for executing the process of FIG. 67 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for determining an operation continuation time when the game rotation operation is performed in each game time. And when the operation for game times of each game time is performed, the operation for game times is finally stopped when the operation duration time determined by the operation duration determination means has elapsed,
The operation continuation time deciding means is configured such that the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means when the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means becomes a game round start target. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that a longer operation duration is more easily selected than when a game is to be started.

  When the player who has confirmed the content of the special notification related to the special information stored or stored in the first acquisition information storage means does not want to make the special information related to the special notification subject to the transition determination, It is assumed that it is desired to continue the situation in which special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means by generating a ball entering the second start ball entering section. In this case, according to the feature H5, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is more specific when the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the start of the game times. Since the operation continuation time is longer than when the game is started, the second start during the game related to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means It becomes easy to generate a new entry into the entry part, and accordingly, the situation in which the special information is stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is easily continued.

  Note that for any one of the features H1 to H5, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E19, the features F1, and the above The configuration limited by any one of the features G1 to G4 may be applied.

  In addition, according to each said characteristic, it is possible to solve the following subjects.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit state when a gaming ball has entered a starting ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Is called. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. By displaying, the lottery result is taught to the player. Then, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition win, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the gaming area is executed, and a gaming ball according to the number of balls entering the variable pitching device Is issued.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the pattern is being displayed, the lottery information used for the winning lottery is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be memorized. When lottery information or the like is stored on hold, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the stored lottery information, and the next variation display of the pattern is started.

  The game in the gaming machine having the above configuration is an active game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball enters the start ball entering part, and a lottery result when a ball enters the start ball part It can be said that it consists of a passive game of confirming whether or not the game is successful. With regard to active games, the player pays attention to whether or not the starting ball entry occurs until the upper limit of the reserved memory is reached. The player pays attention to whether or not the final stop result is the stop result corresponding to the winning of the transition to the predetermined gaming state.

  However, even if the active game and the passive game are set as described above, the former is simply a game that causes a lottery opportunity, and the latter is simply a lottery based on the lottery opportunity. It is a game for checking the result, and the difference between the two games is only whether it is related to the start of the lottery or the result of the lottery. Then, there is still room for improvement in terms of diversifying the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable prize-winning device, 33 ... Upper operation opening as 1st starting entrance part, 34 ... Lower operation opening as 2nd starting entrance part, 34b ... Electric accessory drive part, 41 ... Pattern Display device 43... Main display unit 53. Game ball launching mechanism 54. Launch handle 81. Main control device 82. Sound lamp control device 96. Dispensing device 97 97 Dispensing control device 202. ... ROM, 212 ... display control device, 222 ... allocation table storage area, 242 ... MPU, 252 ... MPU, 254 ... work RAM, 255 ... VDP, 265 ... hold display information setting area, 292 ... hold notification permission area 293... Non-holding notification unavailable area 301. First operation opening as a first start entrance part 302. Second operation opening as a second start entrance part 303, 304. DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... 2nd opening as a 2nd starting entrance part, Ga ... 1st reservation display area, Ra ... 1st result display part reservation area as 1st acquisition information storage means, Rb ... 2nd acquisition information storage means As a second result display area reservation area.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A variable pitching means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
A granting means for granting a game ball to a player based on a game ball entering the variable pitching means;
When it is determined whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Is a transition determination means for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means for causing
With
By the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition means, the number of times the switching between the open state and the closed state is performed in the variable pitching means becomes a predetermined number of times In the gaming machine in which the variable entry control is performed and the transition determination is not performed in the state in which the variable entry control is performed,
As the gaming state, a high probability correspondence state and a low probability correspondence state in which the probability of the transition correspondence result is relatively high and low are set,
In the high probability corresponding state, the number of the transition information is larger than the low probability corresponding state,
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The second starting entrance portion includes an acceptance control means capable of switching between a non-acceptance state where a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and an accept state where a game ball is easier to enter. ,
The acceptance control means has a first mode and a second mode that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode as a control mode of the second starting entrance part, and the variable entrance control. In the state where the variable pitch control is performed by means, the first mode is set.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first starting entrance part, with the first prescribed number as an upper limit;
Second acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the second starting entrance part, with a second prescribed number as an upper limit;
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and the second acquisition information storage means,
The special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is more subject to determination by the transition determination unit than the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the determination target of the transition determination unit. It is configured so that the game result that is advantageous for the player is more likely to occur,
The gaming machine is
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means for making the transition determination to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means,
In the low-probability corresponding state and the first mode, the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored or stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination In a situation where the corresponding special notification is executed at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transition determination, the high probability corresponding state and the second mode, First notification control means for preventing predetermined special information stored in or stored in one acquired information storage means from being subject to execution of the special notification;
In the situation corresponding to the high probability state and the second mode, the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination Second notification control means for causing the corresponding special notification to be executed at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the transition determination;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images